Prism System Manual PDF

ADC FlexWave
Prism
Host, Remote and EMS 5.1
System Reference
D-620098-0-20 Rev A
Antenna
Antenna
Antenna
Quad Band
Remote Unit
Host Unit
Antenna
77073-001
ADCP-77-073 Issue 1 3/2009
ADC Telecommunications, Inc.
P.O. Box 1101, Minneapolis, Minnesota 55440-1101
In U.S.A. and Canada: 1-800-366-3891
Outside U.S.A. and Canada: (952) 938-8080
Fax: (952) 917-1717
Copyright
2009 ADC Telecommunications, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Information contained in this document is company private to ADC Telecommunications, Inc. and
shall not be modified, used, copied, reproduced or disclosed in whole or in part without the written
consent of ADC.
Trademark Information
ADC is a registered trademark and FlexWave is a trademark of ADC Telecommunications, Inc. No
right, license, or interest to such trademarks is granted hereunder, and you agree that no such right,
license, or interest shall be asserted by you with respect to such trademark.
Other product names mentioned in this practice are used for identification purposes only and may
be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
Disclaimer of Liability
Contents herein are current as of the date of publication. ADC reserves the right to change the
contents without prior notice. Should the content of printed user documentation shipped with
product differ from documentation provided on a product CD (inclusive of the associated Help
modules), the printed user documentation supersedes the documentation on the product CD. In no
event shall ADC be liable for any damages resulting from loss of data, loss of use, or loss of profits,
and ADC further disclaims any and all liability for indirect, incidental, special, consequential or other
similar damages. This disclaimer of liability applies to all products, publications and services during
and after the warranty period.
Specific Disclaimer for High-Risk Activities
This Software Product is not specifically designed, manufactured, tested or intended for use in high-
risk activities including, without restricting the generality of the foregoing, on-line control of aircraft,
air traffic, aircraft navigation or aircraft communications; or in the design, construction, operation
or maintenance of any nuclear facility. ADC (including its affiliates) and its suppliers specifically
disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for such purposes or any other purposes.
Screenshots in User Documentation
Due to concurrent development of this documentation, artwork, and the FlexWave URH EMS
product, there may be some minor discrepancies between screenshots contained in this
documentation and those actually displayed in the FlexWave URH EMS. These discrepancies will
generally be few and minor and should not affect your understanding of FlexWave URH EMS.
FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference Page iii
ADCP-77-073 Issue 1 03/2009 2009 ADC Telecommunications, Inc.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Preface _______________________________________________ix
FlexWave Prism User Documentation........................................................................... x
Following the EMS Procedures in This Document ...........................................................xi
General Safety Precautions .......................................................................................xii
Standards Certification ............................................................................................ xiii
Part I: FlexWave Prism System Overview ____________1
Chapter 1: FlexWave Prism System_________________________ 3
1.1 Prism System Overview ....................................................................................... 4
1.1.1 Product Features ......................................................................................... 4
1.1.2 Applications ................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Basic System Components.................................................................................... 6
1.3 Multi-Host Systems ........................................................................................... 10
1.4 DART Cards...................................................................................................... 12
1.4.1 DARTs and Host Units ................................................................................ 13
1.4.2 DARTs and Remote Units ............................................................................ 15
1.5 E911 Support ................................................................................................... 16
1.6 Fiber Optic Transport ......................................................................................... 17
1.7 Timeslots Versus Bandwidth ............................................................................... 19
1.8 Bandwidths ...................................................................................................... 20
1.9 AWS and PCS Band Options................................................................................ 24

Page iv FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference
2009 ADC Telecommunications, Inc ADCP-77-073 Issue 1 03/2009
Chapter 2: Prism System Components ______________________27
2.1 FlexWave Prism Family Overview ........................................................................ 28
2.2 FlexWave Prism Host Units ................................................................................. 30
2.2.1 Host Front Panel........................................................................................ 30
2.2.2 Host Network Connection ........................................................................... 33
2.2.3 Host RF Signal Connections......................................................................... 33
2.2.4 Host System Card...................................................................................... 34
2.3 Prism Remote Units ........................................................................................... 35
2.3.1 Handset Interface...................................................................................... 36
2.3.2 Remote Components.................................................................................. 36
2.3.2.1 Remote RF Modules............................................................................ 38
2.3.2.1.1 Remote Duplexer and Low Noise Amplifier ..................................... 40
2.3.2.1.2 Linear Power Amplifiers............................................................... 41
2.3.2.2 Remote SeRF Modules ........................................................................ 42
2.3.2.3 Remote Power Supply and Cable Assembly............................................ 43
2.3.2.4 Solar Shield ...................................................................................... 44
2.3.2.5 Mounting Bracket (Remotes) ............................................................... 45
2.3.2.6 Remote Connectors............................................................................ 46
2.3.2.7 Remote Fiber Connector Cable Assembly............................................... 48
2.3.2.8 Remote Antenna Cable Connections ..................................................... 48
2.3.2.9 Remote Grounding............................................................................. 48
2.3.2.10 Remote Cooling ............................................................................... 48
2.4 Prism System Accessories .................................................................................. 49
2.4.1 Lightning Surge Suppressor (Remote Accessory) ........................................... 49
2.4.2 Uninterruptible Power Supply (Accessory) ..................................................... 49
2.4.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexer System (Accessory)...................................... 49
2.4.4 Course Wavelength Division Multiplexer System (Accessory) ........................... 50
2.4.5 Millimeter Wave Systems (Accessory) .......................................................... 54
2.5 Prism System Specifications ............................................................................... 55
2.5.1 Host Unit Specifications.............................................................................. 55
2.5.2 Remote Unit Specifications ......................................................................... 56
2.5.3 System Nominal Optical Specifications.......................................................... 57
Part II: Host and Remote Installation ______________ 59
Chapter 3: Installing the Host Unit ________________________61
3.1 Before Starting Installation................................................................................. 62
3.2 Tools and Materials............................................................................................ 63
3.3 Install the Host ................................................................................................. 64
3.3.1 Unpacking and Inspection........................................................................... 64
3.3.2 Install Host in Equipment Rack.................................................................... 64
3.3.3 OSP Fiber Cable Installation Guidelines......................................................... 66
3.3.4 Chassis Ground Connection......................................................................... 67
3.3.5 Coaxial Cable Connections .......................................................................... 68
3.3.6 Optical Connections ................................................................................... 70
3.3.7 LC Attenuator ........................................................................................... 71
3.3.7.1 Optical Connections Without WDM System ............................................ 72
3.3.7.2 Optical Connections For Systems With a WDM ....................................... 74
3.3.8 EXT REF Connections ................................................................................. 76
3.3.9 Computer Connection (Craft) ...................................................................... 78
3.3.10 System Alarm Connections........................................................................ 79
3.3.11 Power Connections................................................................................... 81
FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference Page v
3.4 Installing the WDM Host Module Mounting Shelf and WDM Host Module .................... 85
3.4.1 Wavelength Division Multiplexer System Overview ......................................... 85
3.4.2 Install WDM Host Components .................................................................... 88
Chapter 4: Installing the Remote Unit ______________________ 91
4.1 Remote Installation Overview ............................................................................. 92
4.1.1 Installation Hardware Provided with Remote.................................................. 92
4.1.2 Required Tools and Materials....................................................................... 93
4.2 Remote Mounting Plans...................................................................................... 94
4.3 Install the Remote............................................................................................. 95
4.3.1 Unpack and Inspect the Remote and Components.......................................... 95
4.3.2 Install the Remote RF Module(s).................................................................. 96
4.3.3 Ground Wire Installation............................................................................105
4.3.4 Network Cable Installation .........................................................................106
4.3.5 Quad Fiber Cable Installation .....................................................................108
4.3.6 Antenna Cable Installation .........................................................................110
4.3.7 AC Power Wiring Installation ......................................................................112
4.3.8 Determine the Circuit Breaker or Fuse for Remote.........................................116
4.3.8.1 Power Consumption ..........................................................................116
4.3.8.2 Power Consumption Tables.................................................................118
4.3.9 Mount the Remote and Power Up................................................................119
Part III: System Setup and Management __________121
Chapter 5: FlexWave Element Management System __________ 123
5.1 FlexWave EMS Overview ...................................................................................124
5.2 EMS Graphical User Interface.............................................................................126
5.3 Product Identity ...............................................................................................127
5.4 EMS Menu Bar .................................................................................................128
5.5 EMS Alarm Indications ......................................................................................129
5.6 EMS System Requirements ................................................................................130
Chapter 6: Initial Prism System Setup_____________________ 131
6.1 Access the EMS................................................................................................132
6.2 Discover IP Addresses.......................................................................................134
6.3 Enter a Host Name, Clock Source, and Linking Mode .............................................135
6.4 Set the Clock Priority Level ................................................................................138
6.5 Provision the Host SeRF Optical Ports..................................................................139
6.6 Configure the Host DARTs .................................................................................140
6.7 Enter a Remote Name.......................................................................................144
6.8 Configure the Remote SeRF Optical Ports.............................................................146
6.9 Link the Host and Remote DARTs. ......................................................................147
6.9.1 Use of Multi Fibers ....................................................................................147
6.9.2 RF Groups in the Remote and the EMS GUI ..................................................148
6.9.3 Link a Remote DART to a Host DART ...........................................................150
6.10 Conclude Initial System Setup..........................................................................155
6.11 (Optional) Configuring Multi-Host Systems for Manual Mode .................................156
6.11.1 Set the Multi-Host System to Manual Mode.................................................156
6.11.2 Configure the Host DARTs........................................................................156
6.11.3 Configure the Remote DARTs....................................................................161

Page vi FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference
Chapter 7: Using the EMS to Manage a Prism System _________165
7.1 Displaying the System View...............................................................................166
7.2 Setting Auto Refresh.........................................................................................167
7.3 Working with the System Inventory....................................................................168
7.3.1 System Inventory View Components ...........................................................168
7.3.1.1 System Inventory and Host Inventory Tables........................................169
7.3.1.2 Remote Inventory Tables ...................................................................170
7.4 Working with Prism System Network Interfaces....................................................172
7.4.1 Changing to Built-In Network Mode.............................................................174
7.4.2 EMS Access Methods.................................................................................176
7.4.2.1 Accessing the EMS Through the Remote Network Port............................177
7.4.2.2 Accessing the EMS Through the Remote Craft Port ................................180
Chapter 8: Managing User Accounts_______________________183
8.1 FlexWave EMS User Accounts ............................................................................184
8.2 Viewing User Accounts......................................................................................185
8.3 Adding a User Account ......................................................................................186
8.4 Changing a User Access Level ............................................................................190
8.5 Changing the Password of Another User ..............................................................194
8.6 Changing Your Own Password............................................................................196
8.7 Deleting a User Account ....................................................................................198
Chapter 9: Managing Host Units__________________________201
9.1 Viewing the Host Summary ...............................................................................202
9.2 Resetting the Host Unit .....................................................................................203
9.3 Viewing Host SeRF Ethernet Ports.......................................................................205
9.4 Decommissioning a DART in a Host.....................................................................208
9.5 Viewing the Host SeRF Summary .......................................................................210
9.6 Viewing Host SeRF Optical Ports.........................................................................212
9.7 Viewing Host DART Alarms ................................................................................214
Chapter 10: Managing Remote Units ______________________217
10.1 Viewing Remote SeRF Ethernet Ports ................................................................218
10.2 Decommissioning an RF Module in a Remote ......................................................220
10.3 Restarting an LPA...........................................................................................222
10.3.1 Identify the LPA Fault ..............................................................................222
10.3.2 Reset the LPA.........................................................................................224
10.4 Monitoring a Remote Unit ................................................................................226
10.5 Decommissioning a Remote Unit.......................................................................230
10.6 Resetting a Remote Unit..................................................................................232
10.7 Viewing Remote SeRF Alarms...........................................................................234
10.8 Viewing Remote SeRF Optical Ports...................................................................234
10.9 Viewing an Alarm Summary of the Remote RF Groups .........................................236
10.10 Viewing RF Band Alarm Details .......................................................................238
10.11 Viewing Remote GPS Alarms and Location Parameters .......................................241
Chapter 11: Managing Alarms ___________________________243
11.1 Viewing Active Alarms.....................................................................................244
11.2 Viewing an Alarm History Log...........................................................................245
11.3 Masking an Alarm Type ...................................................................................246
11.4 Unmasking an Alarm Type ...............................................................................248
11.5 Troubleshooting Alarms...................................................................................250
FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference Page vii
Chapter 12: SNMP Interface ____________________________ 259
12.1 EMS SNMP Interface .......................................................................................260
12.2 SNMP Overview..............................................................................................261
12.2.1 Background Information on SNMP .............................................................262
12.2.2 MIB Used by FlexWave System.................................................................264
12.3 SNMP Procedures ...........................................................................................265
12.4 Accessing the FlexWave-Prism Agent MIB ..........................................................266
12.5 Configuring the Trap Viewer.............................................................................267
12.5.1 Registering the Manager for Receiving Traps (staticnon AdventNet MIB Browser)
267
12.5.2 Registering the Manager for Receiving Traps (dynamicAdventNet MIB Browser).
268
12.5.3 Viewing Traps.........................................................................................271
12.5.3.1 Date and Time Stamps ....................................................................271
12.5.3.2 Variable Bindings ............................................................................272
12.5.3.3 View the Traps................................................................................274
12.6 FlexWave-URH Agent MIB................................................................................276
12.7 Traps............................................................................................................292
Part IV: Appendices ___________________________295
Appendix A: Host Unit Module Replacement ________________ 297
A.1 Host Fan Replacement Procedure .......................................................................298
A.2 Power Supply Replacement Procedure ................................................................299
A.3 System Card Replacement Procedure..................................................................301
A.4 SeRF Card Replacement Procedure .....................................................................303
A.4.1 Preserve System Configuration...................................................................303
A.4.2 Remove the SeRF Card..............................................................................306
A.4.3 Swap Compact Flash From Old SeRF Card to New SeRF Card..........................307
A.4.4 Install New SeRF Card...............................................................................308
A.5 DART Card Replacement/Installation Procedure....................................................309
A.5.1 Replacing a DART Card in the Host Chassis ..................................................309
A.5.2 Installing a New DART Card in the Host Chassis............................................309
Appendix B: General Information ________________________ 313
B.1 Warranty/Software...........................................................................................313
B.2 Software Service Agreement..............................................................................313
B.3 Repair/Exchange Policy.....................................................................................313
B.4 Repair Charges ................................................................................................314
B.5 Replacement/Spare Products .............................................................................314
B.6 Returned Material.............................................................................................314
Appendix C: Glossary__________________________________ 315
Appendix D: Contacting ADC ____________________________ 319
Index ______________________________________________ 321

Page viii FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference
Intentionally Blank Page
FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference Page ix
PREFACE
FlexWave Prism User Documentation........................................................................... x
Following the EMS Procedures in This Document ...........................................................xi
General Safety Precautions .......................................................................................xii
Standards Certification ............................................................................................ xiii
This document provides basic description, application, and configuration
information about the ADC
FlexWave Prism system. The information in this

document guides you through:
designing a Prism system
installing Prism Host and Remote Units
configuring the Prism system through the FlexWave Web-Based Element
Management System (EMS) Version 5.1. The EMS is an embedded software
application that runs on the Host and that may be accessed via an internet
connection using a Web browser. This document shows how to connect to the EMS
software using a SNMP manager to interact with the SNMP database that is used
to store system parameters. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is an
international standard for remote management of online devices.
Throughout this publication, all items referenced as accessory items are not
furnished with the basic product and must be purchased separately.
Content Page

Page x FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference
FLEXWAVE PRISM USER DOCUMENTATION
The FlexWave Prism user documentation is intended for system engineers,
administrators, and end users that are responsible for planning, administering,
configuring, and maintaining ADC FlexWave Prism systems. Familiarity with SNMP
and common network technologies is required.
Each FlexWave Prism document describes a different aspect of the FlexWave Prism
system. The following manuals correspond to this FlexWave Prism release:
Icons
Three types of messages, identified by icons, appear in the text:
Title ADCP Number
ADC FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference 77- 073
ADC FlexWave Prism Host Unit Installation Guide 77- 071
ADC FlexWave Prism Remote Unit Installation Guide 77- 072
ADC FlexWave Prism Remote Mounting Kit Installation Instructions 77- 077
ADC FlexWave Prism Remote RF Module Installation Instructions 77- 079
ADC FlexWave Prism Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexer User Manual 77- 075
The Caution icon indicates operations or steps that could:
cause personal injury
induce a safety problem in a managed device
destroy or corrupt information
interrupt or stop services.
The Note icon indicates text that contains information about special circumstances.
The User icon indicates text that lists which user roles are required for a procedure or
EMS access.
FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference Page xi
Fonts
You will find the following font conventions in use throughout the document:
This font indicates a reference to a EMS dialog box, menu item, configuration
option, or other parameter.
This font indicates text you type at a prompt.
THIS FONT indicates keys that you need to press on your keyboard.
When a procedure requires clicking on a sequence of items, commas separate the
items. For example, click User Account Management, User Account indicates that in
the Function Explorer Tree, you select the User Account Management node, and then
select the User Account node.
Illustrations
Some illustrations have numeric callouts. These callouts indicate the related step
numbers in the accompanying text.
FOLLOWING THE EMS PROCEDURES IN THIS DOCUMENT
This document includes descriptions of how to use the FlexWave EMS to configure
and manage FlexWave Prism devices.
Starting a Procedure
All procedures in this document assume that you have already logged in to FlexWave
EMS as described in Access the EMS on page 132.
Finishing or Canceling a Procedure
In general, the procedures in this document end each procedure with having you click
OK or Apply to accept changes or input. However, you can also click Close without
clicking Apply to abandon any changes made, or click Refresh to update the data being
shown.
The following table describes the most common EMS dialog buttons.
Button Function
OK Applies your configuration changes and closes the dialog.
Apply Applies your configuration changes without closing the dialog.
Close Discards any changes you have made in the dialogunless you have previously
clicked Applyand closes the dialog. In a performance or status dialog, closes
the dialog.
Refresh Updates status information to reflect current conditions.

Page xii FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Wet conditions increase the potential for receiving an electrical shock when installing or
using electrically- powered equipment. To prevent electrical shock, never install or use
electrical equipment in a wet location or during a lightning storm.
This equipment uses a Class 1 Laser according to FDA/ CDRH rules. Laser radiation can
seriously damage the retina of the eye. Do not look into the ends of any optical fiber. Do
not look directly into the optical transceiver of any digital unit or exposure to laser
radiation may result. An optical power meter should be used to verify active fibers. A
protective cap or hood MUST be immediately placed over any radiating transceiver or
optical fiber connector to avoid the potential of dangerous amounts of radiation
exposure. This practice also prevents dirt particles from entering the adapter or
connector.
This system is an RF Transmitter and continuously emits RF energy. Maintain 3 foot
(91.4 cm) minimum clearance from the antenna while the system is operating. Wherever
possible, shut down the RAN before servicing the antenna.
Always allow sufficient fiber length to permit routing of patch cords and pigtails without
severe bends. Fiber optic patch cords or pigtails may be permanently damaged if bent
or curved to a radius of less than 2 inches (5.1 cm).
Exterior surfaces of the Remote may be hot. Use caution during servicing.
FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference Page xiii
STANDARDS CERTIFICATION
FCC: This equipment complies with the applicable sections of Title 47 CFR Part 15
(Host unit), Part 22 (800 MHz Cellular), Part 24 (1900 MHz - PCS), Part 90 (800/900 -
SMR), and Part 27 (2100 MHz - AWS).
IC: This equipment complies with the applicable sections of RSS-131. The term IC:
before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada Technical
Specifications were met.
The Manufacturer's rated output power of this equipment is for single carrier
operation. For situations when multiple carrier signals are present, the rating would
have to be reduced by 3.5 dB, especially where the output signal is re-radiated and
can cause interference to adjacent band users. This power reduction is to be by
means of input power or gain reduction and not by an attenuator at the output of the
device.
Note: To comply with Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) requirements, the
maximum composite output form the antenna cannot exceed 1000 Watts ERP
(Cellular and SMR), the antenna cannot exceed 1640 Watts EIRP (PCS), and the antenna
must be permanently installed in a fixed location that provides at least 6 meters (20
feet) of separation from all persons.
UL/ CUL: This will be installed in a restricted access location. This equipment
complies with NEMA Type 4, per UL and CUL 50, Standard for Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment. This equipment provides the degree of protection specified by IP65 as
defined in IEC Publication 529.
FDA/ CDRH: This equipment uses a Class 1 LASER according to FDA/CDRH Rules.
This product conforms to all applicable standards of 21 CFR Part 1040.
Caution: Modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
EU Harmonized Standards: Meets essential requirements of R&TTE 1999/5/EC.
Article 3.1aThe protection of the health and the safety of the user and any other
person, including the objectives with respect to safety requirements contained in
Directive 2006/95/EC, but with no voltage limit applying.
Article 3.1bThe protection requirements with respect to electromagnetic
compatibility contained in Directive 2004/108/EC.
Article 3.2In addition, radio equipment shall be so constructed that it effectively
uses the spectrum allocated to terrestrial/space radio communication and orbital
resources so as to avoid harmful interference.
EMC Standards: EN 55022 and EN55024 (CE marked)
Safety Standards:
IEC 60950-1, First Edition (CE marked)
UL 60950-1 (File number E174166) (USA and Canada)

Page xiv FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference
FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference Page 1
PART 1
FLEXWAVE PRISM SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Page 2 FlexWave Prism Host, Remote and EMS 5.1 System Reference
1
FLEXWAVE PRISM SYSTEM
1.1 Prism System Overview ....................................................................................... 4
1.1.1 Product Features ......................................................................................... 4
1.1.2 Applications ................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Basic System Components.................................................................................... 6
1.3 Multi-Host Systems ........................................................................................... 10
1.4 DART Cards...................................................................................................... 12
1.4.1 DARTs and Host Units ................................................................................ 13
1.4.2 DARTs and Remote Units ............................................................................ 15
1.5 E911 Support ................................................................................................... 16
1.6 Fiber Optic Transport ......................................................................................... 17
1.7 Timeslots Versus Bandwidth ............................................................................... 19
1.8 Bandwidths ...................................................................................................... 20
1.9 AWS and PCS Band Options................................................................................ 24
This section provides a basic description and application and configuration
information about the FlexWave Prism system. Throughout this publication, all items
referenced as accessory items are not furnished with the basic product and must
be purchased separately.
Content Page
FlexWave Prism System
1.1 PRISM SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ADCs FlexWave Prism is a compact radio head for macro gap coverage that
supports up to four frequency bands delivering high-performance coverage with
end-to-end management.
The FlexWave Prism enhances wireless networks in outdoor locations and large
venues in an easy and cost-effective manner. Based on patented technology and
ADCs 15-year leadership in outdoor wireless distributed antenna system (DAS)
technology, FlexWave Prism offers mobile operators a small, light, and flexible
solution for extending macro network coverage for 2G, 3G, and 4G services.
The new FlexWave Prism system is ideal for enhancing outdoor and indoor coverage
in cities, suburbs, canyons, tunnels, campuses, stadiums, and other public areas. It is
35 percent lighter and up to 60 percent smaller than the FlexWave URH product it
replaces, and is available in four different cabinet sizes to support one, two, three or
four frequency bands. Operators can future-proof their deployments by purchasing
a larger cabinet and adding more frequency bands when needed. FlexWave Prism uses
ADCs proven radio head technology and management system along with an IP-65
rated remote.
1.1.1 Product Features
Management under the same host end equipment and EMS as the FlexWave URH,
allowing operators to scale legacy URH deployments with the FlexWave Prism
ADCs patented RF-over-fiber transport eliminates installation-dependent gain or
fiber length adjustments
Improved manageability for installation and upgrades
Smaller size to ease placement and zoning approvals
4G readiness with Four Band remote, which is ideal for incorporating 2G and 3G
services with needs of 4G technologies such as LTE
The unique capability to support digital RF as well as baseband compatibility into
a single fiber pair and remote radiating point
Support for millimeter wave backhaul
With its unique use of wideband digital RF transport, FlexWave Prism delivers
reliable and consistent performance in all environments. Signals are not affected
by reflection, dispersion, or frequency attenuation over fiber. FlexWave Prism
delivers a reliable signal at every remote location.
Prism System Overview
1.1.2 Applications
Dense urban environments
Tunnels and canyons
Roadside and coastal
Suburban areas
Corporate and university campuses
Stadium and large public venues
Next-generation network augmentation
1.2 BASIC SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A very basic Prism system consists of a Host Unit (Host) and a Remote Unit (Remote):
The Host is a three rack unit high chassis with multiple cards that mounts in a
standard equipment rack.
The Remote consists of multiple electronic and optical modules mounted in an
outdoor enclosure.
On an optional basis, the Prism system supports reverse path diversity. In addition,
various accessory items including a passive Wavelength Division Multiplexer (WDM)
system, Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexer (CWDM) system, and expansion
panels are available as accessories.
Control and monitoring functions are provided by the FlexWave Element
Management System (EMS).
Some examples of FlexWave Prism Systems are shown in Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2,
Figure 1-3.
Basic System Components
Figure 1-1. Multiple Point-to-Point Configuration
(One Band per Remote, Three Nodes)
Host Unit
Antenna
Band A
Sector Y
Antenna
Band A
Sector B
Antenna
Band A
Sector A
Remote Unit
Remote Unit
Remote Unit
77073-002
RF
Base
Transceiver
Stations
Band A
Sector Y
Band A
Sector B
Band A
Sector A
RF
RF
Figure 1-2. Four Remote Simulcast, Three Bands
Host Unit
Antenna
Band A
Antenna
Band B
Antenna
Band C
Antenna
Band A
Antenna
Band B
Antenna
Band C
Antenna
Band A
Antenna
Band B
Antenna
Band C
Antenna
Band A
Antenna
Band B
Antenna
Band C
Tri-Band
Remote
Base
Transceiver
Stations
Band C
Band B
Band A
RF
RF
RF
77073-003
Tri-Band
Remote
Tri-Band
Remote
Tri-Band
Remote
Basic System Components
Figure 1-3. Three Bands to One Remote
Antenna
Band A
Antenna
Band B
Antenna
Band C
Host Unit
Tri-Band
Remote Unit
Base
Transceiver
Stations
Band C
Band B
Band A
RF
RF
RF
77073-004
1.3 MULTI-HOST SYSTEMS
ADCs FlexWave Prism provides a Multi-Host feature that allows a Prism Remote to be
shared by multiple Host Units. To accomplish this:
One Host is designated as the IP Manager for a set of Remotes; this Host can serve
as IP manager for multiple Remotes. As the IP Manager, the managing Host
controls the exchange of management data with the Remote(s).
There is no Host to Host connectivity.
A Prism Remote can receive bands over multiple fibers that originate on different
Hosts. However, only one Host, the IP Manager, can manage the Remote. If a Host
attempts to manage a Remote already under the management of an IP Manager,
the second Host causes an IP Conflict fault (see Viewing Host SeRF Optical Ports
on page 212).
All the Hosts in a Multi-Host network can be configured to serve as clock master.
Each Host will be configured with a priority level in the range of 0-15. The Host
with the priority level of 1 distributes the clock in the network. If the Host
designated as clock master fails or shuts down, the Host with the next highest
priority level takes over. (For information on setting the master clock, see Set the
Clock Priority Level on page 138.)
The FlexWave EMS provides a Linking Mode parameter that can be set to Automated
or Manual for each Host. The Linking Mode is applicable for all Remotes connected
to the IP Manager. A Multi-Host system requires that the Linking Mode be set to
Manual (see (Optional) Configuring Multi-Host Systems for Manual Mode on
page 156.
The Host that manages the Remote must be able to provision one or more
passbands on that Remote for which the Host does not have a DART card. Remote
DARTs are linked back to one or more Hosts in a Multi-Host system.
Multi-Host Systems
Figure 1-4. Multi-Host System
Tri-Band
Remote
Base
Transceiver
Stations
Band B
Band A
RF
RF
GET SET
(Host that manages the Remote)
Host 1 Location A
Host 2 Location B
77073-022
Base
Transceiver
Station
Band C
RF
1.4 DART CARDS
Digital/Analog Radio Transceiver (DART) cards provide the interface between base
station equipment and the SeRF. There are three types of FlexWave DART cards:
Classic
Single SuperDART
Dual SuperDART.
FlexWave DARTS are band specific assemblies available in the versions listed in
Table 1-1.
DART cards:
amplify, down-convert, filter and digitize the incoming RF signal from the BTS
convert incoming digital signal from the Remote to analog, filter, amplify and
up-convert the frequency from Intermediate Frequency (IF) to RF
provide a bi-directional interface between parallel digital RF (to D/A and from
A/D) and Serial RF (SeRF) to/from SeRF board
perform adjustable delay processing.
Table 1-1. FlexWave DART Card Types
Band Maximum
Bandwidth
(MHz)
Number of
Fiber Slots
Slot
Requirement
Classic DART Cards
AWS 2100 35 6 Single
Cell 850 35 6 Single
PCS 1900 35 6 Single
SMR 800 35 6 Single
SMR 900 35 6 Single
Single SuperDART Cards
GSM 900 35 6 Single
Dual SuperDART Cards
AWS 2100 45 8 Dual
GSM 1800 75 12 Dual
PCS 1900 70 12 Dual
UMTS 2100 60 12 Dual
DART Cards
1.4.1 DARTs and Host Units
The Host can support up to eight Classic DARTS and/or Single SuperDARTs or up to
four Dual SuperDARTs. Figure 1-5 provides generic representations of Classic DARTS
or Single SuperDARTs and Dual SuperDARTs.
Figure 1-5. DART Cards
Generic representation of a
Classic DART or Single SuperDART
Genreic representation of a
Dual SuperDART
77073-076
Figure 1-6 shows the possible slot assignments for Single and Dual SuperDARTs, and
where slot-divider bars are located.
A Classic DART or Single SuperDART can be installed in each of the eight slots in
the Host.
Dual SuperDARTs occupy two slots (1/3, 2/4, 5/7 or 6/8).
Dual SuperDARTs cannot occupy slot combinations 3/5 or 4/6.
Any combination of DARTs may be installed.
Figure 1-6. DART Slot Assignments in Host Chassis
Figure 1-7 shows a Host that is fully loaded with Dual SuperDART cards.
Figure 1-7. Host with Dual SuperDARTs
SeRF Card
System Card
Power Supply
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 1
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 3
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 2
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 4
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 7
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 5
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 8
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 6
Fan Assembly
Divider bars between
Slots 1 and 3
and Slots 2 and 4
Slots 5 and 7
and Slots 6 and 8
SeRF Card
System Card
Power Supply
Fan Assembly
77073-077
Dual-Slot DART
in Slots 1 and 3
Dual-Slot DART
in Slots 2 and 4
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 7
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 5
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 8
Single-Slot DART
in Slot 6
Slots 1 and 3 and
Slots 2 and 4 removed
to accommodate
Dual-Slot DARTs
SeRF Card
System Card
Power Supply
Fan Assembly
Dual SuperDART
in Slots 1 and 3
Dual SuperDART
in Slots 2 And 4
Dual SuperDART
in Slots 5 And 7
Dual SuperDART
in Slots 6 And 8
77073-078
DART Cards
1.4.2 DARTs and Remote Units
The Remote DARTs are encased in its RF Module. Each RF Module will have up to two
Classic DARTs or Single SuperDARTs, or one Dual SuperDART, and there can be up to:
one RF Module in a Single-Band chassis
two RF Modules in a Dual-Band chassis
three RF Modules in a Tri-Band chassis
four RF Modules in a Quad-Band chassis.
The Remote DART Interface cards (RDI) and the Remote SeRF interface board (RSI)
provide Remote SeRF and DART connectivity for the Prism high speed digital
connections. The configuration of the DART cards provide the RF spectrum.
Prism Remote RF Modules are not field serviceable. To replace a DART within a Prism
Remote, you must replace the RF Module.
1.5 E911 SUPPORT
The DART type determines the maximum number of links, where there can be up to
8 DARTs for a 35MHz spectrum and up to 4 DARTs for a <75MHz spectrum.
E911 support may be achieved by using a configuration similar to the one shown in
Figure 1-8. Remote simulcasting in this configuration requires analog splitting and
combining to and from the individual Host DARTs. External analog
splitting/combining ensures that the E911 system receives uplink signals from each
Remote location before they are combined with uplink signals from the other
Remotes in the simulcast.
Figure 1-8. 8:1 Analog Simulcast U-TDoA E911 Support Diagram
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
8:1 8:1
DART BOARD (1)
DART BOARD (2)
DART BOARD (3)
DART BOARD (4)
DART BOARD (5)
DART BOARD (6)
DART BOARD (7)
DART BOARD (8)
SeRF BOARD
SYSTEM BOARD
POWER BOARD
FAN CARD
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
2:1 Splitter
E911
E911
E911
E911
E911
E911
E911
E911
B
A
C
K
P
L
A
N
E
B
O
A
R
D
BTS REV
BTS FWD
77073-031
Fiber Optic Transport
1.6 FIBER OPTIC TRANSPORT
In a typical Prism system the Host is connected to the Remote using two single-mode
optical fibers. One fiber is used to transport the forward path optical signal and a
second fiber is used to transport the reverse path optical signal. With the diversity
option, the diversity reverse path optical signal is sent on the same reverse path
fiber. (However, the diversity signal can also be transmitted on a separate fiber pair
if more than 12 timeslots are required at a single Remote.) Because the optical signal
is digital, the input and output RF signal levels at the Host or the Remote are not
dependent on the level of the optical signal or the length of the optical fiber. A
diagram of the standard fiber optic transport system for both a non-diversity and
diversity system is shown in Figure 1-9.
The maximum length of the optical links is dependent on the loss specifications of
the optical fiber and the losses imposed by the various connectors and splices. The
system provides an optical budget of 25 dB (typical) when used with 9/125
single-mode fiber. There must be at least 10 dB of optical loss to prevent over-driving
and possible damage to the optical receiver.
Figure 1-9. Standard Fiber Optic Transport Application
The SeRF (Serialized RF) digital protocol consists of digitized RF, Fast Ethernet, and
Host to Remote communication and management. The protocol provides you with
full access to the 100BASE-T (Ethernet) connection between the Host and each
Remote, and the ability to provision the RF spectrum of the DARTs. The digitized RF
portion of the SeRF protocol is divided into 12 timeslots, with each timeslot
representing roughly 5 MHz of digitized RF spectrum. Utilizing the full 12 timeslots
yields between 60 and 75 MHz of total digitized RF on each SeRF Small Form-Factor
Pluggable (SFP) laser connection.
77073-008
Remote
Unit
Forward Path
Reverse Path
Non-Diversity Fiber Optic Link
Forward Path
Diversity Fiber Optic Link
Reverse Path
And
Diversity Reverse Path
Host
Unit
Remote
Unit
Up To
Eight
The available RF bandwidth per timeslot is shown in Table 1-2.
For example, a user who wishes to transport PCS A block, Cellular A, and AWS B block,
the system would require the following:
PCS A 15MHz, 3 timeslots
Cellular A 10MHz, 2 timeslots
AWS B 10MHz, 2 timeslots
Total = 35MHz, 7 timeslots
Table 1-2. Available RF Bandwidth
Number
of
Timeslots
Maximum Contiguous
RF Bandwidth (MHz)
Classic
DARTs
Single and Dual
SuperDARTs
1 5 6
2 12.5 12
3 20 18
4 25 - - -
6 35 39
8 - - - 45
12 - - - 60- 75
Timeslots Versus Bandwidth
1.7 TIMESLOTS VERSUS BANDWIDTH
Each fiber pair supports 12 timeslots, or up to 75 MHz of bandwidth. Table 1-2 shows
the maximum bandwidth versus the number of timeslots.
If more than 70 MHz is required per Remote, up to three additional fiber pairs can be
brought to the Remote to get up to up to 280MHz per Remote (or 300MHz if all four
are GSM-1800). This supports applications where there are two Classic DARTs or
Single SuperDARTs or one Dual SuperDART in a Remote RF Module.
The SeRF (Serialized RF) digital protocol consists of digitized RF, 100BASE-T Ethernet,
and Host to Remote communication and management. The protocol provides you
with full access to the 100BASE-T Ethernet connection between the Host and each
Remote, and the ability to provision the RF spectrum of the DARTs. The digitized RF
portion of the SeRF protocol is divided into 12 timeslots, with each timeslot
representing roughly 5 MHz of digitized RF spectrum. Utilizing the full 12 timeslots
yields between 60 and 80 MHz of total digitized RF on each SeRF SFP laser connection.
1.8 BANDWIDTHS
In the FlexWave Prism system, there are different Bandwidths from which to select,
ranging from 5 to 75 MHz. The different bandwidths allow you to configure the
system to use any contiguous or non-contiguous blocks within the 35 MHz of a single
Host 6-timeslot DART or 60-75 MHz using a 12-timeslot DART. DART bandwidth
options are shown in Table 1-3.
For DART cards, if you need to use non-contiguous blocks within a given 35 MHz,
then the selected bandwidth must span both of these blocks, even if the blocks in
between are not used. For example, if you want to use both PCS D and E blocks, select
PCS D+B+E, which spans 25 MHz. This allows both PCS D & E to be transported and
the B block is effectively unused.
PCS D and E are only 10 MHz of spectrum, four timeslots are required since the actual
transported spectrum is 25 MHz for the PCS D, B, E block, as shown in Table 1- 3.
Table 1-3. DART Bandwidths
Band
Down- Link RF Band
(MHz)
Up- Link RF Band
(MHz)
Bandwidth Slots
(MHz)
Start Stop Start Stop
Bandwidth
in MHz
# of
Timeslots
AWS A 2110 2120 1710 1720 10 2
AWS A+B 2110 2130 1710 1730 20 3
AWS A+B+C 2110 2135 1710 1735 25 4
AWS A+B+C+D 2110 2140 1710 1740 30 6
AWS A+B+C+D+E 2110 2145 1710 1745 35 6
AWS B 2120 2130 1720 1730 10 2
AWS B+C 2120 2135 1720 1735 15 3
AWS B+C+D 2120 2140 1720 1740 20 3
AWS B+C+D+E 2120 2145 1720 1745 25 4
AWS B+C+D+E+F 2120 2155 1720 1755 35 6
AWS C 2130 2135 1730 1735 5 1
AWS C+D 2130 2140 1730 1740 10 2
AWS C+D+E 2130 2145 1730 1745 15 3
AWS C+D+E+F 2130 2155 1730 1755 25 4
AWS D 2135 2140 1735 1740 5 1
AWS D+E 2135 2145 1735 1745 10 2
AWS D+E+F 2135 2155 1735 1755 20 3
AWS E 2140 2145 1740 1745 5 1
AWS E+F 2140 2155 1740 1755 15 3
AWS F 2145 2155 1745 1755 10 2
AWS 2100 2110 2155 1710 1755 45 8
AWS H 1995 2000 1915 1920 5 1
Cellular A 870 880 825 835 10 2
Bandwidths
Cellular A' 890 891.5 845 846.5 1.5 1
Cellular A''+A 869 880 824 835 11 2
Cellular A''+A+A' 869 891.5 824 846.5 22.5 4
Cellular A''+A+B+A'+B' 869 894 824 849 25 4
Cellular B 880 890 835 845 10 2
Cellular B' 891.5 894 846.5 849 2.5 1
Cellular B+B' 880 894 835 849 14 3
GSM 1800 FullBand 1805 1880 1710 1785 75 12
GSM 900 FullBand 921 960 876 915 39 6
PCS A 1930 1950 1850 1865 20 3
PCS A+D 1930 1950 1850 1870 20 3
PCS A+D+B 1930 1965 1850 1885 35 6
PCS A+D+B1 1930 1955 1850 1875 25 4
PCS A+D+B1+B2 1930 1960 1850 1880 30 6
PCS A1 1930 1935 1850 1855 5 1
PCS A1+A2 1930 1940 1850 1860 10 2
PCS A2 1935 1940 1855 1860 5 1
PCS A2+A3 1935 1945 1855 1865 10 2
PCS A2+A3+D 1935 1950 1855 1870 15 3
PCS A2+A3+D+B 1935 1965 1855 1885 30 6
PCS A2+A3+D+B+E 1935 1970 1855 1890 35 6
PCS A2+A3+D+B1 1935 1955 1855 1875 20 3
PCS A2+A3+D+B1+B2 1935 1960 1855 1880 25 4
PCS A3 1940 1945 1860 1865 5 1
PCS A3+D 1940 1950 1860 1870 10 2
PCS A3+D+B 1940 1965 1860 1885 25 4
PCS A3+D+B+E 1940 1970 1860 1890 30 6
PCS A3+D+B+E+F 1940 1975 1860 1895 35 6
PCS A3+D+B1 1940 1955 1860 1875 15 3
PCS A3+D+B1+B2 1940 1960 1860 1880 20 3
PCS B 1950 1965 1870 1885 15 3
PCS B+E 1950 1970 1870 1890 20 3
PCS B+E+F 1950 1975 1870 1895 25 4
PCS B+E+F+C3 1950 1980 1870 1900 30 6
PCS B+E+F+C3+C4 1950 1985 1870 1905 35 6
PCS B1 1950 1955 1870 1875 5 1
PCS B1+B2 1950 1960 1870 1880 10 2
PCS B2 1955 1960 1875 1880 5 1
PCS B2+B3 1955 1965 1875 1885 10 2
Table 1-3. DART Bandwidths (Cont.)
Band
Down- Link RF Band
(MHz)
Up- Link RF Band
(MHz)
Bandwidth Slots
(MHz)
Bandwidth
in MHz
# of
Timeslots
PCS B2+B3+E 1955 1970 1875 1890 15 3
PCS B2+B3+E+F 1955 1975 1875 1895 20 3
PCS B2+B3+E+F+C 1955 1990 1875 1910 35 6
PCS B2+B3+E+F+C2 1955 1982.5 1875 1902.5 27.5 6
PCS B2+B3+E+F+C3 1955 1980 1875 1900 25 4
PCS B2+B3+E+F+C3+C4 1955 1985 1875 1905 30 6
PCS B3 1960 1965 1880 1885 5 1
PCS B3+E 1960 1970 1880 1890 10 2
PCS B3+E+F 1960 1975 1880 1895 15 3
PCS B3+E+F+C 1960 1990 1880 1910 30 6
PCS B3+E+F+C + SMR G 1960 1995 1880 1915 35 6
PCS B3+E+F+C2 1960 1982.5 1880 1902.5 22.5 4
PCS B3+E+F+C3 1960 1980 1880 1900 20 3
PCS B3+E+F+C3+C4 1960 1985 1880 1905 25 4
PCS C 1975 1990 1895 1910 15 3
PCS C + SMR G 1975 1995 1895 1915 20 3
PCS C + SMR G + AWS H 1975 2000 1895 1920 25 4
PCS C1 1982.5 1990 1902.5 1910 7.5 2
PCS C1 + SMR G 1982.5 1995 1902.5 1915 12.5 2
PCS C1 + SMR G + AWS H 1982.5 2000 1902.5 1920 17.5 3
PCS C2 1975 1982.5 1895 1902.5 7.5 2
PCS C3 1975 1980 1895 1900 5 1
PCS C3+C4 1975 1985 1895 1905 10 2
PCS C4 1980 1985 1900 1905 5 1
PCS C4+C5 1980 1990 1900 1910 10 2
PCS C4+C5 + SMR G 1980 1995 1900 1915 15 3
PCS C4+C5 + SMR G + AWS H 1980 2000 1900 1920 20 3
PCS C5 1985 1990 1905 1910 5 1
PCS C5 + SMR G 1985 1995 1905 1915 10 2
PCS C5 + SMR G + AWS H 1985 2000 1905 1920 15 3
PCS D 1945 1950 1865 1870 5 1
PCS D+B 1945 1965 1865 1885 20 3
PCS D+B+E 1945 1970 1865 1890 25 4
PCS D+B+E+F 1945 1975 1865 1895 30 6
PCS D+B+E+F+C3 1945 1980 1865 1900 35 6
PCS D+B1 1945 1955 1865 1875 10 2
PCS D+B1+B2 1945 1960 1865 1880 15 3
PCS E 1965 1970 1885 1890 5 1
PCS E+F 1965 1975 1885 1895 10 2
Band
Down- Link RF Band
(MHz)
Up- Link RF Band
(MHz)
Bandwidth Slots
(MHz)
Bandwidth
in MHz
# of
Timeslots
Bandwidths
PCS E+F+C 1965 1990 1885 1910 25 4
PCS E+F+C + SMR G 1965 1995 1885 1915 30 6
PCS E+F+C + SMR G +AWS H 1965 2000 1885 1920 35 6
PCS E+F+C2 1965 1982.5 1885 1902.5 17.5 3
PCS E+F+C3 1965 1980 1885 1900 15 3
PCS E+F+C3+C4 1965 1985 1885 1905 20 3
PCS F 1970 1975 1890 1895 5 1
PCS F+C 1970 1990 1890 1910 20 3
PCS F+C + SMR G 1970 1995 1890 1915 25 4
PCS F+C + SMR G + AWS H 1970 2000 1890 1920 30 6
PCS F+C2 1970 1982.5 1890 1902.5 12.5 2
PCS F+C3 1970 1980 1890 1900 10 2
PCS F+C3+C4 1970 1985 1890 1905 15 3
PCS FullBand 1930 2000 1850 1920 70 12
SMR 851- 869 (SMR Low Wide) 851 869 806 824 18 3
SMR 863- 869 (SMR Low) 863 869 818 824 6 2
SMR 935- 940 (SMR High) 935 940 896 901 5 1
SMR G 1990 1995 1910 1915 5 1
SMR G + AWS H 1990 2000 1910 1920 10 2
UMTS 2100 2110 2170 1920 1980 60 12
Band
Down- Link RF Band
(MHz)
Up- Link RF Band
(MHz)
Bandwidth Slots
(MHz)
Bandwidth
in MHz
# of
Timeslots
1.9 AWS AND PCS BAND OPTIONS
The Dual-AWS and Dual-PCS DARTs allow you to span non-contiguous bands:
the Dual-AWS DART comprises two 6-Timeslot AWS DARTs that span the full 45
MHz of the AWS band
the Dual-PCS DART provides two PCS blocks over the entire 70 MHz PCS
spectrum.
In the forward path, the two Remote DARTs are summed together before being sent
to the Linear Power Amplifier (LPA). In the reverse direction, the Low Noise Amplifier
(LNA) is split providing the full PCS or AWS spectrum to each DART. Each DART is
responsible for transporting its own spectrum, as shown in an the following example
for a PCS configuration.
Prism Host Prism Remote
PCS
DART
PCS
DART
TX
RX
TX
RX
PCS
DART
PCS
DART
LPA
PCS
Duplexor
Duplexer/
LNA
+
SeRF SeRF
77073-028
AWS and PCS Band Options
PCS Configuration Example:
If the application requires both the A and C block, in the Remote the forward path of
the PCS A band is combined with the forward path of the PCS C band and these
signals are sent to the LPA to be amplified. In the reverse direction, the Duplexer/LNA
passes/amplifies the entire PCS band. The first DART digitizes the PCS A block
reverse path and the second DART digitizes the PCS C block reverse path and then
sends them back to the Host to be reconstructed back into RF.
The installer needs to provide the separate connections at the Host location either by
splitting already combined signals to/from each DART, or by providing them
independently.
If the two PCS reverse path blocks are combined at the Host location, then they must be
separated by at least 5 MHz to insure that the reverse paths do not interfere with each
other during the re- combining.

2
PRISM SYSTEM COMPONENTS
2.1 FlexWave Prism Family Overview......................................................................... 28
2.2 FlexWave Prism Host Units ................................................................................. 30
2.2.1 Host Front Panel........................................................................................ 30
2.2.2 Host Network Connection............................................................................ 33
2.2.3 Host RF Signal Connections......................................................................... 33
2.2.4 Host System Card...................................................................................... 34
2.3 Prism Remote Units ........................................................................................... 35
2.3.1 Handset Interface...................................................................................... 36
2.3.2 Remote Components.................................................................................. 36
2.3.2.1 Remote RF Modules............................................................................ 38
2.3.2.1.1 Remote Duplexer and Low Noise Amplifier ..................................... 40
2.3.2.1.2 Linear Power Amplifiers............................................................... 41
2.3.2.2 Remote SeRF Modules ........................................................................ 42
2.3.2.3 Remote Power Supply and Cable Assembly............................................ 43
2.3.2.4 Solar Shield ...................................................................................... 44
2.3.2.5 Mounting Bracket (Remotes) ............................................................... 45
2.3.2.6 Remote Connectors............................................................................ 46
2.3.2.7 Remote Fiber Connector Cable Assembly............................................... 48
2.3.2.8 Remote Antenna Cable Connections ..................................................... 48
2.3.2.9 Remote Grounding............................................................................. 48
2.3.2.10 Remote Cooling ............................................................................... 48
2.4 Prism System Accessories .................................................................................. 49
2.4.1 Lightning Surge Suppressor (Remote Accessory) ........................................... 49
2.4.2 Uninterruptible Power Supply (Accessory) ..................................................... 49
2.4.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexer System (Accessory) ...................................... 49
2.4.4 Course Wavelength Division Multiplexer System (Accessory) ........................... 50
2.4.5 Millimeter Wave Systems (Accessory)........................................................... 54
2.5 Prism System Specifications ............................................................................... 55
2.5.1 Host Unit Specifications .............................................................................. 55
2.5.2 Remote Unit Specifications.......................................................................... 56
2.5.3 System Nominal Optical Specifications.......................................................... 57
Content Page
Prism System Components
2.1 FLEXWAVE PRISM FAMILY OVERVIEW
The ADC FlexWave Prism family of products is a Distributed Antenna System (DAS)
that provides ADCs patented technologybidirectional transport of digitized RF
spectrum over fiber. The high-speed digitalization of a wideband portion of spectrum
allows for transport of RF signals over extended distances, without the RF
degradation that normally results when analog systems are impacted by optical
effects. The basic function of the FlexWave Prism platform is to transport via fiber
optic cable RF signals from a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) to an antenna interface
allowing communication to a mobile device. Multiple BTS communication paths are
allowed over a single Prism system. Each link consists of a Host that provides the
interface between the base station RF ports and the optical fiber, and at least one
Remote that provides the interface between the optical fiber and the remote antenna.
A block diagram of the system is shown in Figure 2-1.
Figure 2-1. FlexWave Tri-Band Prism Block Diagram
FlexWave
Host
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
BTS 2
BTS 3
Antenna
Interface
BTS 2
Antenna
Interface
BTS 3
NON-DIVERSITY
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
BTS 2
BTS 3
Antenna
Interface
BTS 2
Antenna
Interface
BTS 3
DIVERSITY
REV DIV RF OUT
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
REV DIV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
REV DIV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
REV DIV RF IN
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
REV DIV RF OUT
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
REV DIV RF OUT
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FlexWave
Host
FlexWave
Remote
FlexWave
Remote
77073-005
FlexWave Prism Family Overview
The basic function of FlexWave Prism simulcast (point-to-multipoint) is to transport,
via fiber optic cable, RF signals from a Base Transceiver Station (BTS) to multiple
antenna interfaces allowing communication to a mobile device (see Figure 2-2). Up to
8 simulcast Remotes are supported.
Figure 2-2. System Block Diagram for Eight-Way Simulcast
FlexWave
Host
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
BTS 1
BTS 2
BTS 3
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
FWD RF IN
REV RF OUT
FlexWave
Remote 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FWD RF OUT
REV RF IN
FlexWave
Remote 2
FlexWave
Remote 8
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
Antenna
Interface
BTS 1
77073-006
2.2 FLEXWAVE PRISM HOST UNITS
The Host is designed for maximum RF flexibility to address Carriers changing and
evolving spectrum needs, making the most use of cost efficient resources for serving
multiple remotes such as simulcast architecture and sharing of common functions
such as power, control and management over multiple Hosts. Each Host may be
interfaced with one or more Base Transceiver Station (BTS). Each BTS provides the RF
channel inputs and outputs for a designated sector.
The Host is designed as a compact package that reduces rack space required within
a BTS Hotel. The Host is a three rack-unit high single-unit assembly that mounts in a
standard 19- or 23-inch equipment rack. Its front access interfaces with the BTS for
transport to subtended Remotes, and performs the analog to digital and electrical to
optical conversions for transport to a Host and subtended Remotes. Each Host can
support up to eight Remotes. The Remote is a modular self-contained outdoor
enclosure that houses various electronic components.
2.2.1 Host Front Panel.
The Host is designed for use within a non-condensing indoor environment such as
inside a wiring closet or controlled environment cabinet. All controls, connectors, and
indicators (except the grounding point) are mounted on the Host front panel and
allows vertical cable guides to be installed over the mounting brackets on either side.
The Host user interface on its front panel comprises the connectors, switches,
terminals, and LEDs that are described in Figure 2-3 and Table 2-1.
The Host can be mounted in either a 19- inch or 23- inch EIA or WECO equipment rack.
Unless noted otherwise, views of the Host in this document show the mounting
brackets in the 23- inch position. The default is the 19- inch position.
FlexWave Prism Host Units
Figure 2-3. User Interface on Host Front Panel
Table 2-1. Host User Interface
Ref No User Interface
Designation
Device Functional Description
SeRF Card
1 SeRF Card LEDs
ALARM ON
OFF
Initial bootup sequence
System operation normal
SYNTH GREEN
RED
Locked
Unlocked
SW FLT ON
OFF
RED
Initial bootup sequence
Software operating OK
Software failed to start
PWR GREEN
RED
OFF
Power OK and operating properly
Power supply out of tolerance
No power present
(3) Optical Port
FWD & REV
Connectors 1 -8
(5) Craft
Interface
(4) Network
Interface (12) REF LED
Indicators
(1) SeRF CARD
ALARM LEDS
(9) System Card
Power LED
Indicator
(7) DC Power
ON/OFF Switch
(8) Power
Connector
(13 & 14)
REF OUT
& IN Jacks
(10) Host
Alarm
Outputs
(11) Remote
Alarm Outputs
(6) Power
LED Indicator
(18) FWD RF
IN Jack
(16) DART Status
LED Indicator
(15) DART Power
LED Indicator
(17) REV RF
OUT Jack
(19) Two 12-Timeslot DARTs
(2) SFP RX
and TX LEDs
77073-032
(20) Four
6-Timeslot
DARTs
2 SFP TX (LED) OFF
GREEN
RED
No Small Form- Factor Pluggable (SFP)
present
SFP is present and the FPGA internal PLL is
locked
SFP is present and the FPGA internal PLL is not
locked
SFP RX (LED) OFF
GREEN
AMBER
No Small Form- Factor Pluggable (SFP)
present
Receiver has locked and framed to the
incoming signal
Receiver has locked to the incoming
frequency, but there is no framing
information on the fiber
3 PORT 18 LC connector
(single- mode)
Input/ output connection points for Ports 1
through 8 optical fibers. (FWD and REV)
4 NETWORK RJ- 45 jack (female) Connection point for the NETWORK interface
5 CRAFT RJ- 45 jack (female) Connection point for the CRAFT interface
POWER SUPPLY
6 PWR (LED) GREEN
RED
DC Power Supply OK
DC Power Supply Fault
7 ON/ OFF On/ Off rocker switch Provides Host power on/ off control
8 POWER 2060 Vdc Three position
connector
Connection point for the DC power wiring
SYSTEM CARD
9 PWR (LED) GREEN
RED
System Card Power Supply OK
System Card Power Supply Fault
10 ALARM OUTPUTS
HOST
Twelve position
terminal block.
Screw- type terminal
connector (1426
AWG)
Connection points for a major and minor dry
alarm contacts. Includes normally open (NO),
normally closed (NC), and common (COM)
wiring connections
11 ALARM OUTPUTS
REMOTE
12 INT REF (LED) GREEN
OFF
Internal 10 MHz reference selected as the as
Reference Clock.
Internal 10 MHz reference not selected.
EXT REF (LED) GREEN
OFF
External 10 MHz reference selected as the as
Reference Clock.
External 10 MHz reference not selected
13 REF OUT QMA- Type female RF
coaxial connector
10 MHz reference clock output that may be used
to synchronize between multiple host units.
14 EXT REF IN QMA- Type female RF
coaxial connector
10 MHz reference clock output that may be used
to synchronize between multiple host units.
Table 2-1. Host User Interface (Cont.)
Designation
FlexWave Prism Host Units
2.2.2 Host Network Connection
The SeRF front panel has a Network port that creates a network connection between
the Host and the network to monitor and configure the FlexWave Prism system
through the FlexWave EMS.
The network interface connection between the Host and the network is supported by
a Gigabit Ethernet (10/100/1000) RJ-45 jack with integrated green ACTIVITY and
LINK LEDs. The Network port supports a maximum cable length of 100 meters (328
feet) to a switch or back-to-back nodes. CAT5 or better cable should be used when
making this connection. The Ethernet connection should not be connected to an
Ethernet circuit used outside the building.
For further information on using the Network port and the FlexWave EMS, see
System Setup and Management.
2.2.3 Host RF Signal Connections
The RF signal connections between the Host DART cards and the BTS are supported
through two (FWD RF IN and REV RF OUT) QMA-Type female connectors. One
connector is used for the forward path RF signal. The other connector is used for the
reverse path RF signal. In some installations, it may be necessary to install a
Conditioning Panel and/or Duplexing Panel (accessory items) to support the interface
between the Host and the BTS. The Host should be as close as possible to the BTS to
minimize cable losses.
DART CARD
15 PWR (LED) GREEN
OFF
Card is powered.
No power present at card.
16 STATUS (LED) GREEN
RED
YELLOW
OK
Major Alarm
ALC activated
17 REV RF OUT QMA- Type female RF
coaxial connector
Output connection point for the primary reverse
path RF coaxial cable
18 FWD RF IN QMA- Type female RF
coaxial connector
Input connection point for the forward path RF
coaxial cable
19 & 20 Slots 1 - 8 Classic DARTs
Single SuperDARTs
Dual SuperDARTs
Classic DARTS and Single SuperDARTs can
occupy Slots 1 - 8 (usually a 6- Timeslot
DART)
Dual SuperDARTs can occupy Slots 1/ 3, 5/ 7,
2/ 4 or 6/ 8 (12- Timeslot DARTs)
Table 2-1. Host User Interface (Cont.)
Designation
2.2.4 Host System Card
The System Card contains the fan controller, the clocking circuitry (internal or
external), the temperature sensor and the DCC contacts. Its front panel provides
connections for alarm outputs, 10 MHz output, and status LEDs. This card may be
used to provide a 10 MHz clock reference to which the SeRF's Master clock is
frequency locked from the internal crystal oscillator. When the internal clock is not
used the clock can be obtained from an external 10 MHz input.
Prism Remote Units
2.3 PRISM REMOTE UNITS
The Remote, shown in Figure 2-4, controls RF emissions, interfaces with the FlexWave
Host and performs the optical to electrical conversions for transport to the antennas.
The Remote is an environmentally-sealed unit that houses the electronic assemblies
such as the DART board and the Power Amplifier, and seals out dirt and moisture.
The Prism uses fans located on the top of each unit to cool the chassis. The antenna
cable connectors, fiber connectors, AC power connector, and the unit status indicator
are located on the bottom of the unit.
Figure 2-4. Prism Remote Units
Single-Band Remote Dual-Band Remote
Tri-Band Remote
Quad-Band Remote
77073-007
The FlexWave Remote supports or provides the following basic functions:
Receives on the forward path the digitized spectrum from the Host and converts
the spectrum back into an RF signal to be distributed via an externally mounted
antenna system. On the reverse path, the Remote digitizes the designated RF
spectrum and digitally transports it over single mode fiber or Millimeter Wave
(MMW) to the Host.
Provides RF interface (antenna port) for the antennas.
Accepts AC power input.
2.3.1 Handset Interface
The Remote interfaces with the handsets (cell phones) through an antenna. In the
reverse path, the Remote receives RF signals from each handset (see Figure 1-3 on
page 9). The Remote digitizes the RF signals and then converts them to digital optical
signals for transport to the Host over the optical fiber link. In the forward path, the
Remote receives digital optical signals from the Host. The Remote converts the
optical signals to RF signals for transmission to the handsets.
2.3.2 Remote Components
Prism Remotes are shipped ready to accept easy to install RF Modules. The following
sections describe the Remote components listed below and shown in Figure 2-5.
RF Modules
SeRF Module
Remote SeRF interface board (RSI)
DART cards
Remote DART Interface (RDI) board
Power supply boards
Linear Power Amplifier (LPA)
Duplexer with a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA)
Solar shield
Prism Remote Units
Figure 2-5. Prism Remote Components
SeRF
module
Duplexer
DART
card
Linear Power
Amplifier
(not shown)
Solar Shield
RF Module
(4 in this
Quad-Band Prism)
Remote DART
Interface (RDI)
Power Supply
(not shown)
SeRF module
Remote Slot MOD D
RF Module / Band D
Remote Slot MOD C
RF Module / Band C
Remote Slot MOD B
RF Module / Band B
Remote Slot MOD A
RF Module / Band A
77073-009
2.3.2.1 Remote RF Modules
The Prism Remote comprises from 1 to 4 RF Module slots as shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6. RF Modules in Prism Remotes
Dual-Band Remote
with 2 RF module slots
Single-Band Remote
with 1 RF module slot
RF
module
slots
Tri-Band Remote
Quad-Band Remote
RF
module
slots
77073-019
Prism Remote Units
A Prism can support up to four RF Modules, dependent on the chassis size. Each RF
Module can comprise any of the following DART combinations:
one Classic DART or one Single SuperDART
two Classic DARTs
two Single SuperDARTs
one Classic DART and one Single SuperDART
one Dual SuperDART.
A Prism Remote can therefore comprise up to eight single-slot DARTS or up to four
Dual SuperDARTs, dependent on the Remote chassis size.
The Remote RF Modules are not field serviceable. To replace a DART card, you have
to replace the RF Module.
Figure 2-7. Remote RF Module
Mounting
latch
Mounting
hook
Duplexer
Linear Power
Amplifier (LPA)
Remote DART
Interface (RDI)
77073-036
2.3.2.1.1 Remote Duplexer and Low Noise Amplifier
The Remote has an internal Duplexer that is optimized to provide the desired RF
band-pass filtering and in-band equipment isolation between FWD and REV paths.
The Duplexer contains up to two REV path Low Noise Amplifiers (LNA for PRI and/or
SEC reverse paths). Each LNA (shown in Figure 2-8) is a high quality low noise
amplifier providing the Prism reverse path with nominal 30dB REV gain and system
NF of 5dB per RX path. The Duplexer and its LNA are housed in the RF Module, and
are not field servicable.
Figure 2-8. Remote Duplexer with Low Noise Amplifiers
Low Noise Amplifers in Duplexer
77073-050
Prism Remote Units
2.3.2.1.2 Linear Power Amplifiers
Figure 2-9 shows a Prism Linear Power Amplifier (LPA), which is a high quality
broadband RF amplifier used for achieving Prism product rated power for the Remote
Tx forward path spectrum RF. The LPAs are pass-band specific, with the maximum
composite Tx power levels, and >10dB instantaneous peak power rating listed in
Table 2-2. The LNA is housed within the Duplexer, and is not field serviceable.
Figure 2-9. Linear Power Amplifier
Table 2-2. LPA Maximum Composite Tx Power Levels
Passband Maximum dBm
(WATT)
Instantaneous Bandwidth
PCS +43dBm (20W) 70 MHz
Cellular
+43dBm (20W) 25 MHz
AWS +43dBm (20W) 45 MHz
SMR 800/ 900 +38dBm (6.5W) 18 MHz SMR800, 5 MHz SMR900
UMTS +42 dBm (15.8W) 60 MHz
GSM 1800/ DCS +41 dBm (12.6W) 75 MHz
EGSM 900 +40 dBm (10W) 39 MHz
75347-0006
2.3.2.2 Remote SeRF Modules
The SeRF Module houses the SeRF board that supports:
eight SFP Fiber interfaces that run the SeRF protocol
eight DART Board interfaces
one crossbar multiplexer that splits, sums, and routes combinations of up to eight
DART links to a maximum of eight identical SeRF links
10/100 Mbps ENET over fiber (up to 8 fibers)
hardware control of Remote under direction from the managing Host
Figure 2-10. Remote SeRF Module
SeRF Mounting Tab
(1 on each side)
Door Alarm
SeRF module
Power Supply
Bottom of
Remote Enclosure
77073-039
Prism Remote Units
2.3.2.3 Remote Power Supply and Cable Assembly
The Remote is powered by 100 to 240 VAC (nominal 120 or 240 VAC), 50 to 60 Hz
power. The AC power is supplied through a 15-foot (4.6m) three-wire power cable
that is provided with the unit. The power cable connects to a 3-pin AC power
connector mounted on the bottom of the Remote.
The stub end of the power cable must be routed to an external junction box (not
provided) for connection to the AC power source. A circuit breaker rated at 20 Amps
(120 VAC) should be used to provide over-current protection for the Prism power
circuit. It is also recommended that an external AC outlet (not provided) be installed
near the Remote to power test equipment and tools.
The Remote model determines the number of power supplies.
The Single-Band Remote is powered by one power supply.
The Dual-Band Remote is powered by two power supplies.
The Tri- and Quad-Band Remotes are powered by three power supplies.
There are up to four switches that independently control DC power for each RF
Module. These switches are labeled MOD A, MOD B, MOD C, and MOD D and
correspond to the RF Module shelves, from bottom to top, that are labeled the same.
Figure 2-11. Remote Power Supply
For further information on calculating required power, see Power Consumption on
page 116.
Power module
AC switch
for Remote
DC switches (4)
labeled MOD A - MOD D
for up to 4 RF Modules
Up to three power
supply units
SeRF module will be installed
on top of the Power Supply module
77073-038
2.3.2.4 Solar Shield
The Prism solar shields are required to conduct air over the outside of the Prism. The
Prism ships with the solar shield factory installed.
Figure 2-12. Solar Shield
Quad-Band Remotes
Solar Shield is closed Solar Shield is open,
Remote door is closed
Solar Shield and Remote door are open
77073-024
Prism Remote Units
2.3.2.5 Mounting Bracket (Remotes)
The Prism is designed to be pole or wall mounted or mounted on a flat surface.
Figure 2-13. Prism Back ViewMounting Components
Retracting-Lifting
Eye
Wall-Attachment
points (2)
Four pairs of
Mounting Hooks
77077-007
2.3.2.6 Remote Connectors
The bottom of the Remote comprises the RF, fiber and RJ-45 connectors as well as a
Status LED as indicated in Figure 2-14 and described in Table 2-3.
Figure 2-14. FlexWave Prism Remote Unit User Interface
NETWORK
AUX.
MOD A
RX1
MOD A
TX0/RX0
FIBER 1
FIBER 2
MOD B
TX0/RX0
MOD B
RX1
MOD C
TX0/RX0
MOD D
TX0/RX0
MOD C
RX1
MOD D
RX1
POWER
100-240 VAC
50-60 Hz
16 AMPS
77073-017
Prism Remote Units
Table 2-3. FlexWave Prism Remote Unit User Interface
User Interface Designation Device Functional Description
FIBER 1 BX5 Duplex Female
single- mode angled
UPC fiber (>50 dB return
loss
1
)
Two fiber pairs which can support up to 140
MHz of duplexed RF spectrum.
FIBER 2 BX5 Duplex Female
single- mode angled
UPC fiber (>50 dB return
loss
1
)
Two additional fiber pairs which can be used
to get to the maximum of 280 MHz of RF
spectrum.
Mod A TX0/ RX0
2
N- Type 50- Ohm female
RF coaxial connector
RF Module A connection point for transmit RF
power and primary receive to/ from the
antenna.
Mod A RX1 N- Type 50- Ohm female
RF Module A connection point for diversity
receive for RF power from the antenna.
Mod B TX0/ RX0 N- Type 50- Ohm female
RF Module B connection point for transmit RF
antenna.
Mod B RX1 N- Type 50- Ohm female
RF Module B connection point for diversity
Mod C TX0/ RX0 N- Type 50- Ohm female
RF Module C connection point for transmit RF
antenna.
Mod C RX1 N- Type 50- Ohm female
RF Module C connection point for diversity
Mod D TX0/ RX0 N- Type 50- Ohm female
RF Module D connection point for transmit RF
antenna.
Mod D RX1 N- Type 50- Ohm female
RF Module D connection point for diversity
Network Sealed RJ- 45 female
connector
Connection point for communication with the
entire connected network: Host, Remote, and
ENET connected devices at the Remote.
Status LED Red LED At startup, the Status LED is ON (solid red)
prior to being controlled by the SeRF
processor. Otherwise, when the Remote is in
service, the Status LED is OFF.
100/ 240 VAC
5060 HZ
16 Amps (Quad- Band)
13 Amps (Tri- Band)
10 Amps (Dual- Band)
6 Amps (Single- Band)
Sealed 3- wire AC power
connector
Connection point for the AC power cord.
Supplied ground lug Connection point for grounding unit.
1
ADC connector specification
2
Mod A/ RF Module A is the bottommost Module in a Remote and Mod D/ RF Module D is the topmost
module in a Quad- Band Remote.
2.3.2.7 Remote Fiber Connector Cable Assembly
A fiber connector cable assembly is provided with 10 meters of environmentally
hardened cable and 1 meter of exposed, un-terminated single-mode 900m optical
fiber sufficient for splicing in an OSP splice tray.
2.3.2.8 Remote Antenna Cable Connections
The TX0/RX0 antenna cable connections are through 50-ohm N-type female
connectors. The Remote includes an internal Duplexer which allows a single antenna
cable to carry both forward and reverse path RF signals between the antenna and the
Remote. The RX1 diversity antenna cable connections are through 50-ohm N-type
female connectors.
2.3.2.9 Remote Grounding
A double-ground stud and ring lug is supplied with the unit. A #6 copper wire
terminated with the provided ring terminal must be provided to link the Remote to
an earth ground source.
2.3.2.10 Remote Cooling
The electronic compartment of the Prism is sealed to the environment. Prism
conducts its heat to a rear heat sink and the front doors. Two external
environmentally hardened fans are controlled and monitored by the system. When
turned on, these fans pull air over the external surfaces of the enclosure to ensure
the electronics run within their rated temperature. The fans run at three different
speeds depending on the internal temperature of the system. An alarm is generated
if a high temperature condition occurs within the enclosure.
The maximum ambient operating temp is 50C (122F).
The pigtail is a reduced bending radius type fiber. Therefore not all fusion splicers will
work to splice it. Do not use a splicer that uses light to align the cores.
30M, 40M, 60M, 80M, 100M and 150M fiber connector cable assemblies are also
available from ADC.
For proper and safe equipment operation, an approved earth ground connection must
be provided. The recommended minimum wire size is #6 AWG copper wire.
Prism System Accessories
2.4 PRISM SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
This section provides a brief description of various accessory items that are available
separately. The accessory items may or may not be required depending on the
application.
2.4.1 Lightning Surge Suppressor (Remote Accessory)
An externally-mounted lightning surge suppressor is available separately as an
accessory for the Remote. To reduce the chance of damage to electronic components
should a lightning strike occur, install a lightning surge suppressor at each antenna
port that connects to an outdoor antenna. The surge/antenna connector on the
lightning suppressor is an N-type female connector. The Prism Remote Unit must be
properly grounded for the lighting surge suppressor to function properly.
2.4.2 Uninterruptible Power Supply (Accessory)
Any power interruption without an external Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
system will potentially result in an RF power outage. If a UPS is required it should be
designed into the site plan during the engineering process.
2.4.3 Wavelength Division Multiplexer System
(Accessory)
In some applications, it may be desirable or necessary to combine the forward path
and reverse path optical signals from a single Host/Remote pair onto a single optical
fiber. This can be accomplished by using a passive bi-directional Wavelength Division
Multiplexer (WDM) system. The optical wavelengths used in the Prism system are
1550 nm for the forward path and 1310 nm for the reverse path. Because different
wavelengths are used for the forward and reverse paths, both signals can be
combined on a single optical fiber. A WDM application is shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15. Wavelength Division Multiplexer Application
77073-053
NON-DIVERSITY FIBER OPTIC LINK
FORWARD AND
REVERSE PATH
DIVERSITY FIBER OPTIC LINK
WDM
FORWARD AND
REVERSE PATH
AND
DIVERSITY REVERSE PATH
WDM
HOST
UNIT
REMOTE
UNITS
WDM
REMOTE
UNITS
WDM
UP TO
EIGHT
The WDM Host module mounting shelf and Host module are shown in Figure 2-16.
The WDM module is shown in Figure 2-17. WDMs at the Remote are in the fiber patch
cord and placed in the enclosure.
Figure 2-16. WDM Host Module and Host Module Mounting Shelf
Figure 2-17. Host Unit WDM Module
2.4.4 Course Wavelength Division Multiplexer System
(Accessory)
Prism Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexer (CWDM) systems are pre-configured
with the correct wavelength SFPs installed as well as the correct wavelength OADM
module. SFPs installed in the Host provides the following optical wavelengths:
1470 nm 1550 nm
1490 nm 1570 nm
1510 nm 1590 nm
1530 nm 1610 nm
77073-054
77073-055
The Host is connected to a CWDM chassis that contains the CWDM Mux/DeMux Units
that multiplex the wavelengths from the transceivers onto a single fiber in the
Forward path and de-multiplexes the wavelengths from the Remotes into their
respective wavelengths. The Remote within a CWDM system requires an internal
Prism CWDM Fiber Cable Assembly. Figure 2-18 on Page 51 shows the CWDM
Mux/DeMux unit and Figure 2-19 shows the CWDM Fiber Cable Assembly. For further
information on the Prism CWDM system, see the ADC FlexWave Prism Coarse
Wavelength Division Multiplexer User Manual (ADCP-75-353).
Figure 2-18. Prism Multiplexer/DeMultiplexer
LEFT SIDE PORTS (DEMUX) RIGHT SIDE PORTS (MUX)
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
CWDM
PORTS
CWDM
PORTS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
NOT
USED
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
COM
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27
COM
1611 1591 1571 1551 1531 1511 1491 1471
1611 1591 1571 1551 1531 1511 1491 1471
DEMUX PORTS (FRONT, LEFT SIDE OF CWDM MUX/DEMUX UNIT)
MUX PORTS (FRONT, RIGHT SIDE OF CWDM MUX/DEMUX UNIT)
77073-056
Figure 2-19. CWDM Fiber Cable Assembly
The Prism CWDM system works with ADCs 7- and 3.5-inch industry-standard
WideVAM chassis to ensure consistent, superior cable management within the frame.
The 3.5-inch standard VAM chassis fits into any 19-inch rack mounting environment.
It accommodates a maximum of 4 plug-in modules, 4 bulkhead plates, 4 blank panels
or any combination thereof. Adjustable mounting brackets are provided for 23-inch
rack mounting environments.
Figure 2-20. 3.5-Inch Standard VAM Chassis (FVM-19x350-M6)
OUT FROM OADM 1, REV SEC
FWD (DROP FROM OADM 1 & 2)
REV (ADD FROM OADM 1 & 2)
IN FROM OADM 2, FWD SEC
IN FROM OADM 1, FWD PRIM
OUT FROM OADM 2, REV PRIM
77073-057
77073-051
The 7-inch standard VAM chassis fits into any open chassis location within an
existing ADC 7-inch panel system or in an LGX compatible frame. It accommodates
a maximum of six components, in any combination of the following:
single plug-in modules
bulkhead plates
blank panels.
The 7-inch chassis mounts in EIA or WECO racks. Adjustable mounting brackets are
provided for 19- or 23-inch rack mounting environments.
Figure 2-21. 7-inch Standard VAM Chassis (FVM-19X700W)
77073-052
2.4.5 Millimeter Wave Systems (Accessory)
A Millimeter Wave (MMW) system with a data rate of not less than 3 Gbps (that meets
the FlexWave Prism data rate performance and BER requirements) may be used in
applications where it is desirable or necessary to bridge an open span and where it is
impractical to lay a fiber optic cable. One MMW transceiver unit may be mounted on
the Host side of the open span and the other MMW transceiver unit may be mounted
on the Remote side of the open span. A system diagram of an MMW application is
shown in Figure 2-22. MMW systems are available from various equipment
manufacturers.
Figure 2-22. FlexWave Millimeter Wave Application
A mmw link (3GBps) is required for 12 timeslots worth of RF traffic between the Host
and the Remote. This is roughly 60 - 75MHz depending on the modulation. If a
Remote has more bandwidth requirements (such as 210MHz of RF), there would need
to be 3 point-to-point mmw links.
77073-058
UP TO EIGHT
REMOTE
UNITS
FORWARD PATH
MMW
TX/RX
MMW
TX/RX
FLEXWAVE MILLIMETER WAVE
REVERSE PATH
FORWARD PATH
REVERSE PATH
HOST
UNIT
Prism System Specifications
2.5 PRISM SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
2.5.1 Host Unit Specifications
Parameter Specification Remarks
Dimensions (HWD) 5.17 17.26 9.5 inches
(131.3 438.4 241.3 mm)
Dimension for width does not
include the mounting brackets
which can be installed for either
19- or 23- inch racks.
Mounting 19- or 23- inch rack EIA or WECO
Weight 20 lbs. (9.1 kg)
Weather resistance Indoor installation only Environmentally controlled
outdoor
cabinet.
Operating temperature 0 to 55 C (32 to 131 F)
Storage temperature 40 to 70 C (40 to 158F)
Humidity 10%to 90% No condensation
Optical ports SFP transceivers LC (UPC)
Optical power levels Launch power
Minimum: - 2 dBm
Maximum: 3 dBm
Receive power
Minimum: - 27 dBm
Maximum: - 9 dBm
Transceivers Wavelengths:
Host transmits a 1550 nm
signal
Remote transmits a 1310 nm
signal
Host and Remote can receive
either a 1550 or 1310 nm
signal
For information on transceiver
transmissions with a CWDM, see
the ADC FlexWave Prism Coarse
Wavelength Division Multiplexer
User Manual (ADCP- 75- 353).
External alarm connector Screw- type terminals NO, COM, and NC relay contacts
DC Power 20 60 Vdc
Power consumption Maximum: 320 Watts
Nominal: 202 Watts
Current rating 4.2 Amps
8.4 Amps
At 48Vdc
At +24Vdc
RF coaxial cable connectors 50 ohm QMA type (female) 50 ohms input/ output impedance
Network and Craft connectors RJ45 jack
Reliability at 25C MTBF 200,000 hours Including fans
2.5.2 Remote Unit Specifications
Parameter Specification Remarks
Enclosure dimensions (HWD)
Single- Band 23.1" x 12.15" x 10.125"
(58.67 cm x 30.86 cm x 25.71
cm)
Dual- Band 31.1" x 12.15" x 10.125"
(78.99 cm x 30.86 cm x 25.71
cm)
Tri- Band 39.1" x 12.15" x 10.125"
(99.31 cm x 30.86 cm x 25.71
cm)
Quad- Band 50.2" x 12.15" x 10.125"
(127.51 cm x 30.86 cm x 25.71
cm)
Mounting Wall, Pole, Inside Pole, and
Vault
Weight (with solar shields installed)
Single- Band 64 lbs. (29 kg)
Dual- Band 96 lbs. (43 kg)
Tri- Band 127 lbs. (58 kg)
Quad- Band 163 lbs. (74 kg)
Outside Ambient
Temperature Rating - 40 C to +50 C (- 40 F to
+122 F)
Storage Temperature - 40 C to +70 C (- 40 F to
+158 F)
Humidity 10%to 90%non- condensing
Lightning Protection 20kA IEC 1000- 45 8/ 30 s
Waveform
Provided by external lightning protector
(accessory)
Weather Resistance IP- 65 Indoor or outdoor installation
Cooling Fan, IP- 55
Connectors
Network port RJ- 45 female connector
AC power connector Sealed 3- pin Connection point for the AC power cord
Antenna cable connector 50 ohm N- Type (female) 50 ohms input/ output impedance
Voltage input 100 to 240 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz Operating range 90 to 265 VAC
Current rating 15 AMPS
Prism System Specifications
2.5.3 System Nominal Optical Specifications
Parameter Specification
a
Remarks
Optical - Host and Remote
Unit
Fiber type
9/ 125, single- mode
Number of fibers required
Non- diversity with WDM
Diversity with WDM
Non- diversity without WDM
Diversity without WDM
1
1
2
2
Assumes RF bandwidth does
not exceed 3 Gbps data rate
capacity of the fiber.
Forward path wavelength 1550 nm
Reverse path wavelength 1310 nm
Diversity path wavelength 1310 nm
Optical power levels Launch power
Minimum: - 2 dBm
Maximum: 3 dBm
Receive power
Minimum: - 27 dBm
Maximum: - 9 dBm
Optical budget 25 dB For optical BER of 10
6
Optical connectors Industry standard LC Host and WDM
Optical - Host and Remote
WDM
WDM Passband 1310 nm 20 nm
1550 nm 20 nm
Forward path insertion loss
Host WDM
Remote WDM
0.7 dB
0.3 dB
Does not include connector
loss
Reverse path insertion loss
Host WDM
Remote WDM
0.3 dB
0.7 dB
Does not include connector
loss
Isolation > 30 dB minimum
Return loss (Reflectance) < 50 dB All input ports
a
All specifications apply after a five minute warm- up period.
PART II
HOST AND REMOTE INSTALLATION

3
INSTALLING THE HOST UNIT
3.1 Before Starting Installation................................................................................. 62
3.2 Tools and Materials............................................................................................ 63
3.3 Install the Host ................................................................................................. 64
3.3.1 Unpacking and Inspection........................................................................... 64
3.3.2 Install Host in Equipment Rack .................................................................... 64
3.3.3 OSP Fiber Cable Installation Guidelines......................................................... 66
3.3.4 Chassis Ground Connection......................................................................... 67
3.3.5 Coaxial Cable Connections .......................................................................... 68
3.3.6 Optical Connections ................................................................................... 70
3.3.7 LC Attenuator ........................................................................................... 71
3.3.7.1 Optical Connections Without WDM System ............................................ 72
3.3.7.2 Optical Connections For Systems With a WDM ....................................... 74
3.3.8 EXT REF Connections ................................................................................. 76
3.3.9 Computer Connection (Craft) ...................................................................... 78
3.3.10 System Alarm Connections........................................................................ 79
3.3.11 Power Connections................................................................................... 81
3.4 Installing the WDM Host Module Mounting Shelf and WDM Host Module .................... 85
3.4.1 Wavelength Division Multiplexer System Overview ......................................... 85
3.4.2 Install WDM Host Components .................................................................... 88
This section provides the installation procedures for the Host and the WDM Host
module (accessory item). Installation of the Remote components may proceed
separately from installation of the Host.
Content Page
Installing the Host Unit
3.1 BEFORE STARTING INSTALLATION
Do the following before you begin installation.
Review the system design plan.
Identify the equipment installation site.
Make sure all cable runs are mapped out.
Identify and obtain all tools and materials required to complete the installation.
Tools and Materials
3.2 TOOLS AND MATERIALS
The following tools are required to complete the procedures in this section:
Medium size flat-bladed screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver (#2)
Pliers
Wire cutters
Wire stripper
Tool kit for attaching QMA-Type male connectors to coaxial cable
Crimp tool to attach ring terminals
Multimeter
Optical power meter
Fiber cleaning equipment
The following materials are required to complete the procedures in this section:
#18 AWG (1.0 mm) insulated stranded copper wire (for chassis grounding wire)
#18 AWG (1.0 mm) red and black insulated copper wire (for DC power wires)
Category 3 or 5 cable (for external alarm system wires)
Category 5 cable with RJ45 connectors for the Network and Craft port
#6 ring terminal (1) for #18 wire (for chassis ground wire connection)
#6 fork terminals (2) for #18 wire (for DC power wiring connection)
Single-mode patch cord(s) with LC connectors (1 8 depending on the application)
High performance, flexible, low-loss 50-ohm coaxial cable
QMA-type male connectors
Wire ties
3.3 INSTALL THE HOST
This chapter guides you through installing a Prism Host, which requires 70 steps that
are divided into 11 sections. Follow the steps in the order in which they are provided.
3.3.1 Unpacking and Inspection
This section provides instructions for opening the shipping boxes, verifying that all
parts have been received, and verifying that no shipping damage has occurred.
1 Inspect the exterior of the shipping container(s) for evidence of rough handling
that may have damaged the components in the container.
2 Unpack each container while carefully checking the contents for damage and
verify with the packing slip.
3 If damage is found or parts are missing, file a claim with the commercial carrier
and notify ADC Customer Service (see Contacting ADC on page 319). Save the
damaged cartons for inspection by the carrier.
4 Save all shipping containers for use if the equipment requires shipment at a
future date.
3.3.2 Install Host in Equipment Rack
A pair of reversible mounting brackets is provided that allow the Host to be mounted
in either a 19-inch or 23-inch EIA or WECO equipment rack. When installed, the Host
front panel is flush with the front of the rack.
Both US standard and metric machine screws are included for rack mounting the
Host. When loading the Host in a rack, make sure the mechanical loading of the rack
is even to avoid a hazardous condition such as an unbalanced rack. The rack should
safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it holds.
The maximum ambient temperature for the Host is 55 C (131 F).
The Host to be mounted in either a 19- inch or 23- inch EIA or WECO equipment rack.
Unless noted otherwise, views of the Host show the mounting brackets in the 23- inch
position.
using electrically powered equipment. To prevent electrical shock, never install or use
To insure that all optical connectors remain dust- free during installation, leave all dust
caps and dust protectors in place until directed to remove them for connection.
Install the Host
Use the following procedure to install the Host in the equipment rack:
5 The Host is shipped with the mounting brackets installed for 19-inch rack
installations. If mounting the Host in a 19-inch rack, proceed to Step 6. If
mounting the Host in a 23-inch rack, proceed to Step 8.
6 Remove both mounting brackets from the Host (requires TORX screwdriver with
T20 bit) and save screws (six-screws on each side) for reuse.
7 Reinstall both mounting brackets so the long side of the bracket is flush with the
Host front panel as shown below. Use the screws removed in Step 6 to re-attach
the brackets to the Host chassis.
8 Position the Host in the designated mounting space in the rack (per system design
plan) and then secure (but do not tighten) the Host to the rack using the four
machine screws provided (use #12-24 or M6 x 10 screws, whichever is
appropriate).
9 Locate two vertical cable guides, not provided with the Host.
10 Back out the Host mounting screws just enough to provide clearance for
installation of the cable guides.
11 Slide each cable guide into position for installation and then securely tighten the
corresponding mounting screws.
A vertical cable guide kit is available separately as an accessory.
Install Mounting
Brackets as shown for
installation in 23-inch Racks
77073-060
3.3.3 OSP Fiber Cable Installation Guidelines
The outside plant (OSP) fiber optic cables should be routed between the Host
distribution panel and Remote outside plant cabinet and terminated before the
equipment is installed. A diagram of a typical OSP cable routing is shown in
Figure 3-1. At the Host, the OSP cable should be terminated at a fiber distribution
panel and spliced to fiber patch cords. Jumper patch cords may then be used to link
the Host optical ports to the OSP cable terminations. Whenever possible, a guideway
such as the FiberGuide system should be provided to protect the fiber optic patch
cords from damage and to prevent excessive bending. The procedures for connecting
the OSP cable optical fibers to the Host is provided in Optical Connections Without
WDM System on page 72. and Optical Connections For Systems With a WDM on
page 74.
Figure 3-1. Typical Fiber Optic Cable Routing
Host Unit
Fiber
Distribution
Panel
Outdoor
Remote Site
Host Site
Patch
cords
Indoor/Outdoor
Quad Cable with
Pre-Terminated
Connector *
Outside Plant
Cable
Remote
Unit
77073-059
Indoor
Remote Site
X
Splice
Termination
X
Remote
Unit
Outside Plant
Cabinet
X
* One end of the Quad cable is
connectorized, and the other end
is stub
Install the Host
3.3.4 Chassis Ground Connection
A stud is provided on the rear side of the chassis for connecting a grounding wire to
the chassis. Use the following procedure to connect the grounding wire to the chassis
and to route the grounding wire to an approved earth ground source.
12 Obtain a length of #18 AWG (1.00 mm) insulated stranded copper wire for use as
a chassis grounding wire.
13 Terminate one end of the wire with a ring terminal.
14 Locate the chassis-ground stud at the rear of the Host chassis as shown in in the
following graphic, and then attach the ring end of the wire to the chassis ground
stud.
15 Route the free end of the chassis grounding wire to an approved (per local code
or practice) earth ground source.
16 Cut the chassis grounding wire to length and connect it to the approved ground
source as required by local code or practice.
Maintain reliable grounding. Pay particular attention to ground source connections.
Rear of Host Chassis
Star
washer
Hex
nut
Ground
wire
77073-062
Star
washer
Chassis-
ground
stud
3.3.5 Coaxial Cable Connections
The RF interface between the Host DART card and the EBTS/BTS is supported through
two type QMA female connectors mounted on each DART front panel. One connector
provides the coaxial cable connection for the forward path (downlink) signal and the
other connector provides the coaxial cable connection for the reverse path (uplink)
signal.
In most installations, it is usually necessary to insert an external attenuator into the
forward path link between the Host and the BTS. Before completing the forward path
connection at the BTS, verify that the composite forward path RF signal level at the
Host is between 25 and +5 dBm.
The Host should be mounted as close as possible to the EBTS/BTS to minimize cable
losses. Use the following procedure to route and connect the forward and reverse
path coaxial cables to the Host DART cards:
17 Obtain the required lengths of high performance, flexible, low loss 50-ohm coaxial
communications cable (RG-400 or equivalent) for all coaxial connections.
18 Route the forward and reverse path coaxial cables between the Host and the BTS
interface (per system design plan) and cut to the required length. Allow sufficient
slack for dressing and organizing cables at the Host and for installing an external
attenuator in the forward path link.
19 Terminate each cable with a QMA-Type male connector following the connector
suppliers recommendations.
20 If required, install an external attenuator in the forward path.
21 Connect the forward and reverse path cables as shown in the following graphic.
a Connect the forward path cable to the FWD RF IN connector on the Host DART
front panel.
b Connect the reverse path cable to the REV RF OUT connector on the Host DART
front panel.
The composite forward path RF signal level at the Host must be between 25 and +5
dBm. Do not connect the forward path cable until the composite forward path RF signal
level is measured and the amount of external attenuation required is determined.
Install the Host
22 Repeat this procedure for the remaining DART cards in the Host.
23 Dress and secure cables at the right side of the Host.
24 Complete all remaining coaxial connections as specified in the system design
plan.
77073-063
3.3.6 Optical Connections
Optical connections between the Host SeRF card and the Remote are supported
through Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) transceivers. The optical interfaces are
standard single-mode duplex LC (flat polished UPC). One SFP comes with the
Hostadditional SFPs (up to 7) must be ordered separately as needed.
There are two fiber connectionsone FWD and one REVfor each SFP. As the SeRF
holds up to eight SFPs, there is a total of 16 connections: eight FWD and eight REV.
The FWD path is 1550nm (from the Host to the Remote) and the REV path is 1310nm
(from the Remote to the Host).
Each FWD port provides an optical connection for the forward path (downlink) signal.
Each REV port provide an optical connection for the reverse path (uplink) signal. Each
REV port can also provide the optical connection for the diversity reverse path
(uplink) signal.
The optical connections are dependent on whether or not a WDM Host module
(accessory) is installed:
If the installation does not include a WDM module, proceed to Section 2.9.2 for
the optical connections procedure.
If the installation includes a WDM module, proceed to Section 2.10 for the optical
connections procedure.
not look directly into the optical transmitter of any unit or exposure to laser radiation
may result. An optical power meter should be used to verify active fibers. A protective
cap or hood MUST be immediately placed over any radiating transmitter or optical fiber
connector to avoid the potential of dangerous amounts of radiation exposure. This
practice also prevents dirt particles from entering the connector.
Install the Host
3.3.7 LC Attenuator
To meet 3Gbps optical transmission requirements, the long reach transceivers (SFPs)
must be used. SFPs have the following specifications:
Launch: 0dBm
Normal Operation: -9dBm maximum to -27dBm minimum
Overdrive: >-9dBm
Underdrive: <-27dBm
RX No Light condition: <-34dBm
The receivers specification is -9 to -27dBm. Based on typical fiber runs, there's
usually only a few dB of loss, so the 15dB LC attenuator (Figure 3-2) ships with each
Host to put the receive level in the optimum receive range.
Figure 3-2. LC Attenuator
There is an option of ordering the WDM with a fiber pigtail. The document for the WDM
option describes using the LC attenuator option and requires an additional fiber patch
cord.
77073-064
3.3.7.1 Optical Connections Without WDM System
Use the following procedure to connect the optical fibers when a WDM is not
installed.
25 Obtain two patch cords that are of sufficient length to reach from the Host to the
fiber distribution panel.
26 Designate one of the patch cords as the forward path link and the other as the
reverse path link and attach an identification label or tag next to the connector.
27 Remove the dust caps from the Host SeRF SFP optical ports and from the patch
cord connectors that will be connected to the SeRF SFP optical ports.
28 Clean each patch cord connector following the patch cord suppliers
recommendations.
29 Connect the LC attenuator to the patch cord.
30 Plug the FWD and REV path patch cords to the corresponding transmit (FWD) and
receive (REV) connections depending on the remote node SFP position.
Improper handling can damage fiber optic cables. Do not bend fiber optic cable more
sharply than the minimum recommended bend radius specified by the cable
manufacturer. Do not apply more pulling force to the cable than specified.
Install the Host
31 Route the patch cords from the Host to the fiber distribution panel.
32 At the fiber distribution panel, identify the OSP cable optical fiber terminations
that correspond to the forward and reverse paths.
33 Remove the dust caps from the OSP cable optical fiber adapters and from the
patch cord connectors.
34 Clean each patch cord connector (follow patch cord suppliers recommendations)
and then mate the connector with the appropriate OSP cable adapter.
35 Repeat this procedure for the remaining SeRF SFPs in the Host.
36 Store any excess patch cord slack at the fiber distribution panel or storage panel.
The Host optical adapters are angled to the left. Therefore, always route patch cords to
the Host from the left side of the rack. Routing patch cords to the Host from the right
may exceed the bend radius limitations for the optical fiber.
77073-033
FWD path
REV path
3.3.7.2 Optical Connections For Systems With a WDM
Use the following procedure to connect the optical fibers when a WDM module is
installed with the Host.
37 Obtain a patch cord that is of sufficient length to reach from the WDM module to
the fiber distribution panel.
38 Remove the dust cap from the WDM port on the WDM module and from the patch
cord connector that will be connected to the WDM module.
39 Clean the patch cord connector (follow patch cord suppliers recommendations).
40 Insert the connector into the WDM port on the WDM module.
41 Obtain two patch cords that are of sufficient length to reach from the WDM
module to the Host.
42 Designate one of the patch cords as the forward path link and the other as the
reverse path link and attach an identification label or tag next to the connector.
43 Remove the dust caps from the Host SeRF SFP optical ports and from the patch
cord connectors that will be connected to the SeRF SFP optical ports.
44 Connect the LC attenuator (see Figure 3-2 on Page 71) to the patch cord.
45 Refer to the following diagram to understand the fiber optic connections to the
WDM module.
WDM module ports are labeled FWD, REV, TEST, and WDM.
Fiber Distribution
Panel (FDP)
X
X
Host Unit 1
PORT 8
FWD
PORT 8
REV
REV
path
FWD
path
Wavelength
Division
Multiplexers 1 2 3 4
PORT 1
FWD
PORT 1
REV
Host Unit 2
REV
path
FWD
path
77073-065
To/From
Remote Unit 1
To/From
Remote Unit 1
Host Unit 1
(Bi-Directional Fiber
Link With Remote Unit)
Host Unit 1
PORT 1
FWD
PORT 1
REV
REV
path
FWD
path
1 2 3 4
Test Test
1 2 3 4
Test
Fiber Distribution
Panel (FDP)
X
To/From
Remote Unit 2
Host Unit 2
Install the Host
46 Clean each fiber patch cord connector and then insert the connector into the
appropriate optical port on the Host as shown below.
47 (Optional) If adding CWDM accessories, see the ADC FlexWave Prism Coarse
Wavelength Division Multiplexer User Manual (ADCP-75-353) for installation
information. (For an overview of a Prism CWDM system, see Section 1.2, Course
Wavelength Division Multiplexer System, on page 4).
The Host SeRF SFP optical adapters are angled to the left. Therefore, fiber patch cords
should always be routed to the Host from the left side of the rack. Routing fiber patch
cords to the Host from the right side of the rack may exceed the bend radius limitations
for the optical fiber.
77073-033
FWD path
REV path
3.3.8 EXT REF Connections
EXT REF connections between multiple Hosts is supported through two QMA type
female connectors mounted on the System card. One of the jacks is designated as the
IN port and the other jack is designated as the OUT port. The EXT REF interface allows
Hosts to be connected together (in daisy-chain fashion) and clocked through a single
source.
Use the following procedure to connect EXT REF interface cables between multiple
Hosts:
48 Connect one end of the EXT REF interface cable (accessory) to the EXT REF OUT
port on Host #1.
When using the 10 MHz external reference clock the signal must be connected to the
Host before enabling the clock source in the software. If there isnt a working external
clock source when you configure external timing, the optical sync at the Remote will be
lost and all traffic will stop flowing.
77073-066
Install the Host
49 Connect the interface cables to the other Hosts that are to be daisy-chained to
Host 1. A diagram of typical EXT REF interface connections is shown below. At the
stopping point where no further Hosts are to be connected, the OUT would be left
unconnected:
a Connect the interface cable from the EXT REF OUT port on Host 1 to the IN
port on Host 2.
b Connect the interface cable from the EXT REF OUT port on Host 2 to the IN port
on Host 3.
50 Repeat Step 49 for each additional Host that is added to the network.
Host Unit 3 Host Unit 2 Host Unit 1
OUT EXT IN NET IN NET OUT NET IN NET OUT
77073-034
Coaxial
Interface Cables
To Next Host Unit
(Note: No EXT OUT
connection at last Host)
OUT EXT IN OUT EXT IN
REF Clock
Input
3.3.9 Computer Connection (Craft)
The SeRF front panel provides a Craft port that provides an Ethernet interface that
allows you to connect a computer to access the EMS.
51 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable (CAT5 or better, not provided by ADC) to
the Host Craft port as shown below.
52 Connect the free end of the cable to the computers port. Refer to the user manual
provided with the computer to locate and configure the specified port.
In the default configuration, the Craft port has a DHCP server that assigns an IP address
to the computer that is connected. You should therefore have your network interface
configured for DHCP, or configured with a static IP address in the same subnet, where
the default is 192.168.0.1/ 24.
77073-067
RJ-45
Connector
detail
Install the Host
3.3.10 System Alarm Connections
The alarm interface between the Host and an alarm system is supported by
twelve-terminal plug (with screw-type terminals) that connects to a receptacle
mounted on the Host System card front panel. The terminal plug provides
connections to normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) dry type alarm contacts
for both major and minor alarms. A category 3 or 5 cable is typically used to connect
the Host System card to the alarm system.
Table 3-1. System Card Alarm Pin Designations
PI
N
Description
Required
Wires
NC NO
1 Host Minor Normally Closed X
2 Host Minor Common X X
3 Host Minor Normally Open X
4 Host Major Normally Closed X
5 Host Major Common X X
6 Host Major Normally Open X
7 Remote Minor Normally Closed X
8 Remote Minor Common X X
9 Remote Minor Normally Open X
10 Remote Major Normally Closed X
11 Remote Major Common X X
12 Remote Major Normally Open X
Use the following procedure to install the alarm wiring and connect it to the Host:
53 Obtain the required length of category 3 or 5 cable.
54 Route the cable between the Host System card and the alarm system (if not
already routed) and then cut to the required length. Allow sufficient slack for
dressing and organizing the cable at the Host.
55 Strip back the outer cable sheath and insulation to expose the wires at both ends
of the cable and strip back 0.2 inches (5 mm) of insulation from each wire.
56 Connect the Major alarm wire pair to the MAJOR COM/NC or MAJOR COM/NO
terminals (whichever is required by the alarm system) on the Host System card
alarm terminal connector (supplied with Host System card).
77073-068
Install the Host
57 Connect the Minor alarm wire pair to the MINOR COM/NC or MINOR COM/NO
terminals (whichever is required by the alarm system) on the Host System card
alarm terminal connector (as shown above and in Table 3-1).
58 Connect the Major and Minor alarm wire pairs to the appropriate terminals on the
external alarm system.
59 Dress and secure cable per standard industry practice.
3.3.11 Power Connections
The Host has a modular DC to DC power supply located on the lower left side of the
chassis, which is secured by turning its screws clock-wise until tight.
An On/Off switch is provided on the Host power supply module front panel
(Figure 3-3).
Figure 3-3. Host Power Connector
The Host is powered by 20 to 60 Vdc power (nominal 24 or 48 Vdc), which is
fed to the Host through a connector located on the front of the module. Power to the
Host must be supplied through a fuse panel (available separately). Each Host must be
protected with a fuse.
A three position terminal block is provided for connecting the power wires. The
power is fed to the Host Power Supply module through the Power Connector located
on the Host front panel (Figure 3-3). Power to the Host must be supplied through a
fuse panel such as the 20 position PowerWorx GMT Fuse Panel (available separately)
and the power must be protected with an appropriate GMT fuse:
5 Amp GMT fuse for 48Vdc
10 Amp GMT fuse for 24 Vdc
Power
Connector
DC Power
Switch
77073-069
Table 3-2 provides a Host power consumption matrix that you should use to calculate
power consumption for your system.
* Add 1W for each SFP added
For example, the power consumption of a fully-loaded Host, with four Dual
SuperDARTs, a SeRF card (that comprises eight SFPs), and a System card would be:
Nominal131W
Maximum148.4W
15% Headroom171W
Use the following procedure to install the power wiring:
60 Obtain the items listed below:
Wire stripper and screwdriver
Wire, #18 AWG (1.00 mm) red and black insulated copper wire. Recommended
wire size for the power leads, when fused in the same bay.
61 Turn power switch on power supply OFF.
62 Connect the wires to the designated terminals on the fuse panel.
63 Dress and secure the wires to the rack following local practice. Route wiring away
from sharp edges and secure in place to prevent chaffing and provide strain relief.
64 Route the wires to the terminal block on the Host Power Supply and cut them to
length, allowing sufficient length for termination.
Table 3-2. Host Power Consumption
PCB
Classic or
Single
SuperDART
Dual
SuperDART
System Card
(including Fans)
SeRF
(1 SFP)
SeRF
(8 SFPs)*
Power Consumption
Nominal 18.7W 23W 12W 23W 30W
Maximum 20W 26W 12.4W 25W 32W
All DC input wiring should be routed away from any sharp edges and properly secured
in place to prevent chafing and to provide strain relief. This may be achieved by
tie- wrapping wires to the rack frame or by a similar means.
Install the Host
65 Loop both power wires around and through the Ferrite as shown above. (The
Ferrite is required for FCC radiated-emissions compliance.)
66 Strip 0.5 inch (1.27 cm) of insulation from the end of each wire.
67 Insert one end of each wire into the terminal block, one into the positive (+) and
the other into the negative () position.
68 Insert the terminal block into the 3-pin receptacle on the front of the Host Power
Supply.
69 Install fuses in the fuse panel. Update office records as required.
When connecting the equipment to the supply circuit, check equipment nameplate
ratings to avoid overloading circuits which may cause damage to over- current
protection devices and supply wiring.
77073-070
Ferrite
70 Turn the DC power switch to its ON position.
Under normal operating conditions, the Host responds as follows:
a ImmediatelyPWR LED turns Green
b Within 6 to 7 secondsALARM, SYNTH, and SW FLT LEDs turn Red
c Approximately 10 secondsALARM LED goes out
d Approximately 30 secondsSYNTH LED goes out
e Approximately 1 minuteSW FLT LED goes out
f Approximately 2.5 minutesCraft port assigns IP Address to Laptop,
making Telnet management through the Craft port available
g Approximately 3 minutesSYNTH LED turns Green
h Approximately 5 minutesElement Management System (EMS) available on
Craft port (1 - 2 minutes after SYNTH LED turns Green)
Refer to the following graphic for location of the LEDs referenced above.
ALARM LED
SYNTH LED
SW FLT LED
DC power switch Power LED
77073-074
Craft port
Installing the WDM Host Module Mounting Shelf and WDM Host Module
3.4 INSTALLING THE WDM HOST MODULE MOUNTING
SHELF AND WDM HOST MODULE
A bi-directional wavelength division multiplexer (WDM) system is available as an
accessory item for the Prism system.
If the Prism configuration does not require the use of a WDM system, skip this
section and proceed to Install Host in Equipment Rack on page 64.
3.4.1 Wavelength Division Multiplexer System Overview
The Wavelength Division Multiplexer (WDM) system is an accessory product that is
used when it is desirable or necessary to combine the forward and reverse path
optical signals from one Prism system onto a single optical fiber. Each WDM system
consists of a Host and a Remote. At the Host there is a WDM chassis that contains the
WDM modules, and there is a WDM cable assembly within the Remote. Both the Host
WDM module and the Remote WDM cable assembly consist of a bi-directional
wavelength division multiplexer, as shown in Figure 3-4. Note that the WDM enables
up to three Prism RF bands to operate on a single OSP fiber.
Figure 3-4. WDM System
The Host WDM module is mounted within a powder-paint coated sheet metal
enclosure. A straight LC-type optical connector port is provided for connecting the
forward/reverse path optical fiber to the WDM module. A pair of fiber patch cord
leads with LC-type connectors are provided for connecting the WDM module to the
forward and reverse path optical ports on the Host SeRF card. The WDM Host module
mounting shelf and Host module are shown in Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-5. WDM Host Module and Host Module Mounting Shelf
Figure 3-6 provides WDM port information.
Figure 3-6. WDM Ports
The WDM Test port (Port 3 shown in Figure 3- 6) is a monitor or trap port. When taking
a reading at this port, the signal power is 23 dB less than the input power going into
Port 1. The wavelength of light measured is 1550 nm.
22390-A
Port 1: 1550nm IN (FWD)
Port 2: 1310nm OUT (REV)
Ports
1
2
3
4
77073-029
Port 3: -23dB 1550nm Test port
Port 4: 1310/1550nm
Each WDM module supports a single Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) port on the
Host, but a WDM chassis can support up to 8 WDM modules, which allows it to be
shared among multiple Hosts depending on the SFP port counts and system
configuration. That is, the 8 modules allows a fully loaded Host with 8 SFP modules
or multiple partially-loaded Hosts (for a maximum of 8 total SFPs). The WDM Host
module mounting shelf installs in the equipment rack with the Host. Figure 3-7 shows
a one Host WDM system.
Figure 3-7. One Host WDM System
77073-061
When multiple Hosts require connection to a WDM system, the Host module
mounting shelf and the Hosts should be mounted in the equipment rack as shown in
Figure 3-8. This configuration allows the fiber patch cord leads from the two Host
modules to be connected directly to the optical ports on any one of the four Hosts.
Figure 3-8. Typical WDM and Host Configuration
3.4.2 Install WDM Host Components
The WDM Host module mounting shelf may be mounted in either a 19-inch or 23-inch
EIA or WECO equipment rack. Four #12-24 screws are provided for securing the
mounting shelf to the rack.
Use the following procedure to install the WDM Host module mounting shelf in the
equipment rack and to mount the WDM modules in the WDM Host module mounting
shelf.
WDM MOUNTING
SHELF
(WITHOUT MODULES)
22392-A
POWERWORX
FUSE PANEL
HOST UNITS
HOST SLACK FIBER STORAGE
1 The WDM Host module mounting shelf is shipped with the mounting brackets
installed for 23-inch rack installations. If installing the mounting shelf in a 23-inch
rack, proceed to Step 4. If installing the mounting shelf in a 19-inch rack proceed
to Step 2.
2 Remove both mounting brackets from the mounting shelf (requires Phillips
screwdriver) and save screws for reuse.
3 Reinstall both mounting brackets so the short side of the bracket is flush with the
front panel as shown below. Use the screws removed in Step 2 to attach the new
brackets to the mounting shelf.
4 Position the mounting shelf in the designated mounting space in the rack (per
system design plan) and then secure the mounting brackets to the rack using the
four #12-24 machine screws provided.
5 Install each WDM Host module in the mounting shelf. A rail on the side of the
module fits into a guide within the mounting.
6 Secure each Host module to the mounting shelf by twisting the handle on each
quarter-turn fastener 90.
7 Carefully store the fiber patch cord leads from each Host module. At the Remote
end, the ProAx fiber used in WDM deployments is Fiber Number 1. The routing
and connection procedures for the fiber patch cords are provided in Optical
Connections For Systems With a WDM on page 74. Or, after connecting the fiber
patch cord, correctly store the slack cable.
22393-A
4
INSTALLING THE REMOTE UNIT
4.1 Remote Installation Overview ............................................................................. 92
4.1.1 Installation Hardware Provided with Remote.................................................. 92
4.1.2 Required Tools and Materials....................................................................... 93
4.2 Remote Mounting Plans...................................................................................... 94
4.3 Install the Remote............................................................................................. 95
4.3.1 Unpack and Inspect the Remote and Components.......................................... 95
4.3.2 Install the Remote RF Module(s).................................................................. 96
4.3.3 Ground Wire Installation............................................................................105
4.3.4 Network Cable Installation .........................................................................106
4.3.5 Quad Fiber Cable Installation .....................................................................108
4.3.6 Antenna Cable Installation .........................................................................110
4.3.7 AC Power Wiring Installation ......................................................................112
4.3.8 Determine the Circuit Breaker or Fuse for Remote.........................................116
4.3.8.1 Power Consumption ..........................................................................116
4.3.8.2 Power Consumption Tables.................................................................118
4.3.9 Mount the Remote and Power Up................................................................119
Content Page
Installing the Remote Unit
4.1 REMOTE INSTALLATION OVERVIEW
Installation of the Remote consists of the following basic steps:
1 Unpack and inspect your shipment.
2 Install the RF module(s).
3 Connect the ProAx Fiber Cables.
4 Connect external coaxial antenna cables must be routed from the antenna to the
Remote TX0/RX0 and RX1 connectors.
5 Install the AC power cable and connect it the Remotes AC power port and to an
external junction box .
4.1.1 Installation Hardware Provided with Remote
The installation hardware provided with the Remote is listed in Table 4-1.
To insure that all connectors and ports remain dust- free during installation, leave all
dust caps and dust protectors in place until directed to remove them.
Table 4-1. Remote Unit Installation Hardware
Item Quantity
AC Power Cable (15 feet/ 4.6m) 1
Quad Fiber Cable Assembly 1
(a)
(a) If the Remote has more than 2 SFPs, two Quad
Fiber Cable Assemblies are required.
3/ 8- inch hex standoff 3
3/ 8- inch 10- 32 phillips screw 3
#10 split washer 3
Remote Installation Overview
4.1.2 Required Tools and Materials
The following tools are required in order to complete the procedures in this
instruction:
Socket Wrench and 3/8-inch Deep Socket
Wire cutters
Wire stripper
Compression pliers for splicing grounding cable
Tools for installing exterior AC circuit
Tool kit for attaching N-Type connectors to coaxial cable
Fiber cleaning kit
The following materials are required in order to complete the installation procedures:
#6 AWG (4 mm) copper wire and splice
#10 ring terminal for attaching #6 grounding wire to bottom of unit
Connector for attaching #6 grounding wire to approved earth ground source
Junction box, conduit, fasteners, connectors, and wire to install an exterior AC
circuit.
N-Type male connectors
RJ-45 connector (if making a permanent external network cable connection)
4.2 REMOTE MOUNTING PLANS
The FlexWave Prism Remote Unit has a low profile design that requires minimal real
estate for installation. The basic dimensions and weights of the Remote are listed in
Table 4-2.
The Prism Remote should be mounted on a utility pole, mast, or on a flat surface. A
mounting kit is available for each unit. Installation consists of securing the bracket
to the mounting surface (wood, concrete, or steel) and then hanging the unit from the
bracket. The Remote should only be mounted in a restricted access location.
Detailed instructions for mounting the FlexWave Prism Remote are in the Remote Unit
Mounting Kit Installation Instructions (ADCP-77-077).
Table 4-2. Remote Dimensions
Remote Configuration Depth Width Height Weight of Fully
Populated Units
Single- Band
10.51" 12.15" 22.50" <65 lbs
Double Band
10.51" 12.15" 30.50" <96 lbs
Triple Band
10.51" 12.15" 38.46" <127 lbs
Quad- Band
10.51" 12.15" 49.60" <165 lbs
Install the Remote
4.3 INSTALL THE REMOTE
This chapter guides you through installing a Prism Remote, which requires 63 steps
that are divided into 9 sections. Follow the steps in the order in which they are
provided.
4.3.1 Unpack and Inspect the Remote and Components
This section provides instructions for opening the shipping boxes, verifying that all
parts have been received, and verifying that no shipping damage has occurred. Use
the following procedure to unpack and inspect the Host and any accessories:
Unpack and inspect the various components as follows:
1 Inspect the exterior of the shipping container(s) for evidence of rough handling
that may have damaged the components in the container.
2 Unpack each container while carefully checking the contents for damage and
verify with the packing slip.
3 If damage is found or parts are missing, file a claim with the commercial carrier
and notify ADC Customer Service (see Contacting ADC on page 319). Save the
damaged cartons for inspection by the carrier.
4 Save all shipping containers for use if the equipment requires shipment at a
future date.
This is restricted access equipment and only service personnel should open and operate
this equipment using appropriate tools
using electrically- powered equipment. To prevent electrical shock, never install or use
Installation of the Remote may proceed separately from the installation of the
corresponding Host.
4.3.2 Install the Remote RF Module(s)
The RF Module cables that are pre installed in the Remote connect to the
corresponding connectors on the RF Module. The RF Module cables correlate to the
antenna connectors on the bottom of the Remote chassis. The cables and connectors
have corresponding labels as shown in Table 4-3. The RF cable and connector labels
also correspond to the RF Module slots in the Remote chassis, where MOD A is the
bottom shelf and MOD D is the top shelf.
Table 4-3. RF Antenna Labels
Remote RF
Module
Shelf
RF Module Cable,
RF Module
Connector, and
Remote Antenna
Connector Labels
Function
MOD A Mod A TX0/ RX0 Transmit RF power and primary receive to/ from the antenna for
RF Module A
Mod A RX1 Diversity receive for RF power from the antenna for RF Module A
MOD B Mod B TX0/ RX0 Transmit RF power and primary receive to/ from the antenna for
RF Module B
Mod B RX1 Diversity receive for RF power from the antenna for RF Module B
MOD C Mod C TX0/ RX0 Transmit RF power and primary receive to/ from the antenna for
RF Module C
Mod C RX1 Diversity receive for RF power from the antenna for RF Module C
MOD D Mod D TX0/ RX0 Transmit RF power and primary receive to/ from the antenna for
RF Module D
Mod D RX1 Diversity receive for RF power from the antenna for RF Module D
Install the Remote
In the following steps, the RF cables and connectors are referred to as MOD N TX0/RX0
and as MOD N TRX1 where N equals A, B, C, or D.
5 Unpack and inspect the RF Module as described in Unpack and Inspect the
Remote and Components on page 95.
6 Open the Remote enclosure.
7 Remove release liners, if present, from the thermal pads on the RF Module prior
to installing the module into the Remote chassis.
Thermal pads are located as follows:
one large pad on the back surface (LPA)
up to two on the front surface (DARTs)
two on the left side for the (RDI).
8 Hold the RF Module so that the DART card(s) face away from the Remote and the
Mounting Hook is toward the Receiving flange on the Remote chassis.
Handle the RF Module with care during installation. Be especially careful to not damage
the thermal- interface material (TIM), which is attached to the LPA. If the TIM is damaged,
the LPA can overheat. Before installing the RF Module, check to see if the heatsink
material is gouged or cracked. If the TIM is damaged, do not install the RF Module and
contact ADC for assistance (see Contacting ADC on page 319 for contact information).
If the thermal- interface material is damaged, the installation and use of the RF Module
may void the warranty of the RF Module.
The thermal pads are very sensitive to mishandlingdo not nick, scratch, or ding them.
Always install RF Modules from the bottom up and do not skip a shelf.
9 Holding the RF Module at a 45 angle in respect to the rear heatsink, rest the
bottom surface of the module on the RF Module shelf.
SeRF Module
MOD A
MOD B
MOD C
MOD D
77073-040
Install the Remote
10 Aligning the mounting hook on the module with the receiving flange on the
Remote heat sink, and slide the RF Module in toward the flange until it can go no
further.
RF Module
Mounting hook
Chassis
Receiving
flange
77073-044
11 Push the left edge of the RF Module back and into the Remote chassis until it can
go no further.
Make sure the RF Module is seated correctly in the Module shelf. Incorrect alignment of
the RF Module can cause the RF Module to fail due to over heating.
The front edge of the RF Module should be parallel with the shelf above it.
The Mounting hook on the RF Module should be fully engaged with the Receiving flange
on the Remote chassis.
If you later cannot shut the Remote door, verify that the RF Module is installed
correctly.
77073-045
Install the Remote
12 Secure the two module latches on the left side of the RF Module.
13 Verify that the RF Module Mounting hook is engaged correctly by pulling the
module away from the heat sink. The RF Module should not move. If the RF
Module moves during this check, repeat Step 9 on page 98 through Step 12.
14 Position the cables so that are under the right edge of the RF Module, pointing up.
77073-041
15 Follow these rules when connecting the RF Module cables:
At each RF Module shelf, the Power (PWR) cable and two high-speed-data
cables will always be provided.
If you are installing a Non-Diversity Chassis, only one RF cable labeled MOD N
TX0/RX0 will be populated.
Always connect the high-speed-data cable labeled DIV. This protects against
the cable getting caught in the chassis door.
If you are installing a Diversity Chassis, both RF cables labeled MOD N TX0/RX0
and MOD N RX1 will be populated.
For Diversity modules, all cables are to be connected.
If you order a Non-Diversity RF Module and are installing it in a Diversity
chassis, connect it as if it was being installed into a Non-Diversity chassis.
When you order a Dual SuperDART module, connect both high-speed data
cables (PRIM and DIV) and the RF TX0/RX0 cable.
Adhere to a minimum bend radius of 1" for all RF cables from the integrated
cable guide to the module.
Maintain adequate strain relief distances from connection points to the
module.
16 Working from the bottom connector up, connect the RF Module cables.
a If this is a Diversity chassis, connect the RF Diversity cable labeled MOD N RX1
to the RX1 connector and turn the thumbscrew to secure the cable to the
chassis.
b Connect the RF cable labeled MOD N TX0/RX0 to the TX0/RX0 connector and
turn the thumbscrew to secure the cable to the chassis.
c Connect the MOD N DIV high-speed-data cable to the DIV connector. This
connects the Remote SeRF interface board (RSI) to the Diversity DART.
d Connect the MOD N PRIM high-speed cable to the PRIM connector. This connects
the RSI to the Primary DART.
e Connect the Power cable to the PWR connector. This connects the RF Module to
the DC power connection.
Always connect the Diversity high- speed- data cable, even for nondiversity modules.
This prevents the cable from getting caught between the chassis door and the RF
Module.
Install the Remote
17 Ensure that all cable bends are below the top edge of the Connector Interface
Panel as indicated by the dashed line in the preceding figure. Failure to correctly
position the cables could inhibit closing the Remote door, which can result in
damage to the cables.
MOD A
MOD D
MOD C
MOD B
SeRF
Module
TX0/RX0
RX1
DIV
PRIM
PWR
77073-043
Note routing of
high-speed cables
Note bend
radii 1-inch
Edge of Connector Interface Panel
18 Toggle the Power switch that corresponds to the RF Module to its ON position.
19 Repeat Step 5 through Step 18 to install other RF Modules.
MOD A
SeRF
Module
AC Power
switch for
Remote
chassis
DC Power switch for Mod A
DC Power switch for Mod B
DC Power switch for Mod C
DC Power switch for Mod D
MOD B
MOD C
MOD D
77073-048
Install the Remote
4.3.3 Ground Wire Installation
20 Locate a #6 AWG (4 mm) copper grounding wire long enough to reach an approved
earth ground.
21 Use a socket wrench with a 3/8-inch deep socket to remove the two 10-32 Keps
Nuts from the Remotes Dual-Ground connector.
22 Secure the ring terminal end of the grounding wire to the ground studs on the unit
using the two 10-32 Keps Nuts removed in Step 21, and then torque the nuts to
18 in-lbs 1 in-lb.
23 Route the free end of the grounding wire to an approved earth ground source.
24 Cut the ground wire to length and connect it to the earth ground source as
specified by local code or practice.
Avoid sharp bends in the ground wire.
For proper and safe equipment operation, use a #6 copper wire terminated with the
provided ring terminal to link the Remote to an earth- ground source.
Partial Bottom View
Dual-Ground Connector
77073-014
To Earth Ground
Ground Wire
10-32 Keps Nut
Ring Terminal
4.3.4 Network Cable Installation
The Remote provides a Network port allowing communications with the internal
processor and transfer of service data to the optical protocol allowing IP servicing
between the Host and Remote(s). That is, this provides a LAN extension to the Host
network. The Network port is 10/100/1000 BASE-T/TX (802.3ab compliant) MDI and
requires a minimum of CAT 5 cable.
The network cable must be terminated with a hardened RJ-45 male connector for
connection to the Network port. The maximum cable length is 300 feet (91.4 m).
Use the following procedure to install the Network cable:
25 Remove the dust cap from the RJ-45 connector located at the bottom of the
Remote.
26 Route the network cable from the network connection to the underside of the
Remote.
27 Align the plug end of the RJ-45 cable connector with the RJ-45 port receptacle and
then insert the cable plug into the port receptacle.
Although the interface might provide GigE, only 100 Mbps is provided for bandwidth
between the Host and Remote.
NETWORK
AUX.
MOD A
RX1
MOD A
TX0/RX0
FIBER 1
FIBER 2
MOD B
TX0/RX0
MOD B
RX1
MOD C
TX0/RX0
MOD D
TX0/RX0
MOD C
RX1
MOD D
RX1
POWER
100-240 VAC
50-60 Hz
16 AMPS
RJ-45 Network
Connector port
Network cable
Connector nut
RJ-45 plug
Bottom View
77073-010
Install the Remote
28 Slide the connector nut up to the port until it engages the connector locking
mechanism.
29 Tighten the connector nut in a clockwise direction (if necessary, use a wrench or
pliers to grip the connector nut) until it snaps past the indented position and
locks into place. It may be necessary to apply 30 to 50 in-lbs (3.4 to 5.6 Nm) of
torque to the connector nut in order to turn it past the indented position.
4.3.5 Quad Fiber Cable Installation
The Prism Remote ships with 10 meters of environmentally hardened cable with 1
meter of exposed, un-terminated single-mode 900m optical fiber sufficient for
splicing in an Outside Plant (OSP) splice tray. The fiber cable connector is a BX5 4-port
fiber connector.
Use the following procedure to install the fiber cables:
30 Remove ProAx connector dust cover located at the bottom of the Remote.
NETWORK
AUX.
MOD A
RX1
MOD A
TX0/RX0
FIBER 1
FIBER 2
MOD B
TX0/RX0
MOD B
RX1
MOD C
TX0/RX0
MOD D
TX0/RX0
MOD C
RX1
MOD D
RX1
POWER
100-240 VAC
50-60 Hz
16 AMPS
77073-011
Fiber 2 is a
ProAx connector
that comprises
4 BX5 connectors.
Bottom View
Install the Remote
31 Remove the dust cap from the fiber cable BX5 connector (FIBER 1).
32 Align the plug end of the BX5 cable connector with the BX5 port receptacle and
then insert the cable plug into the port receptacle as shown below, and then slide
the strain relief boot over the connector.
NETWORK
AUX.
MOD A
RX1
MOD A
TX0/RX0
FIBER 1
FIBER 2
MOD B
TX0/RX0
MOD B
RX1
MOD C
TX0/RX0
MOD D
TX0/RX0
MOD C
RX1
MOD D
RX1
POWER
100-240 VAC
50-60 Hz
16 AMPS
BX5 CABLE
CONNECTOR
77073-012
Fiber 1 is a
ProAx connector
that comprises
4 BX5 connectors
Bottom View
Shaded area is the
Alignment Key for
the BX5 cable
connector
33 Route the fiber cable from the underside of the Remote to the OSP box. Observe
the fiber numbers and their positions in the quad cable connector as shown
below. The fibers at the other end of the fiber cable are numbered with the same
numbering scheme.
34 Secure fiber cable in place following local practices.
35 If a second fiber cable assembly is required (for example, your Prism system has
three SFPs to handle up to 280 MHz of RF bandwidth), complete Step 30 through
Step 34 to add the second fiber cable assembly, only this time, connect to the
Fiber 2 ProAx connector located at the bottom of the Remote as shown in Step 30.
4.3.6 Antenna Cable Installation
Coaxial antenna cables must be routed from the antenna to the Prism Remote. The
cables must be terminated with an N-Type male connector for connection to the
Remote antenna port or the lightning surge suppressor (accessory).
To comply with Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) requirements, the maximum
composite output from the antenna cannot exceed 1640 Watts EIRP and the antenna
must be permanently installed in a fixed location that provides at least 6 meters (20 feet)
of separation from all persons.
REV
Fiber 4
SFP2
77073=047
SFP3
FWD
Fiber 1
SFP1
FWD
Fiber 1
SFP1
REV
Fiber 2
SFP3
REV
Fiber 2
SFP2
FWD
Fiber 3
SFP4
FWD
Fiber 3
SFP4
REV
Fiber 4
Install the Remote
Refer to Table 4-4 for the relationship between antenna numbers and Remote RF
modules.
Use the following procedure to install the antenna cable(s):
36 Remove the dust cap from the N-type female connector located on the underside
of the unit as shown below.
Table 4-4. Antenna Connectors
Antenna
Connector Label
RF Module Function of Connection Point
Mod A TX0/ RX0
2
RF Module A Transmit RF power and primary receive to/ from the antenna
Mod A RX1 RF Module A Diversity receive for RF power from the antenna
Mod B TX0/ RX0 RF Module B Transmit RF power and primary receive to/ from the antenna
Mod B RX1 RF Module B Diversity receive for RF power from the antenna
Mod C TX0/ RX0 RF Module C Transmit RF power and primary receive to/ from the antenna
Mod C RX1 RF Module C Diversity receive for RF power from the antenna
Mod D TX0/ RX0 RF Module D Transmit RF power and primary receive to/ from the antenna
Mod D RX1 RF Module D Diversity receive for RF power from the antenna
2
Mod A/ RF Module A is the bottommost Module in a Remote and Mod D/ RF Module D is the
topmost module in a Quad- Band Remote.
NETWORK
AUX.
MOD A
RX1
MOD A
TX0/RX0
FIBER 1
FIBER 2
MOD B
TX0/RX0
MOD B
RX1
MOD C
TX0/RX0
MOD D
TX0/RX0
MOD C
RX1
MOD D
RX1
POWER
100-240 VAC
50-60 Hz
16 AMPS
Bottom View
Antenna
cable
Lightning
Surge Suppressor
(ships with RF Module)
Surge port
connector
N-type female
Antenna port
for Module A
77073-013
37 If specified, connect a lightning surge suppressor (accessory) to the antenna port.
38 Connect a ground wire to the lightning surge suppressor. Connect the ground wire
to an approved earth ground.
39 Route the coaxial antenna cable from the antenna to the underside of the Remote.
40 Cut the antenna cable to the required length and terminate with an N-type male
connector.
41 Connect the antenna cable to the lightning surge suppressor or to the antenna
port; apply 15 in-lbs (1.7 Nm) of torque.
42 Repeat the Step 36 through Step 41 for the remaining antenna cables.
4.3.7 AC Power Wiring Installation
A 15-foot, 3-wire cable with connectors is provided for the AC power connections.
The connector end of the cable connects to the AC power port located on the bottom
of the unit. The stub end of the cable must be routed to an external junction box (not
provided) for permanent connection to the AC power system wiring.
The AC power source must supply between 100 and 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz,
single-phase power through a circuit breaker or fuse. The AC power cable provides
three wire leads for line, neutral, and ground connections. The power cable is rated
for indoor or outdoor use and must not be placed within electrical conduit as this will
impede the cooling of the cable during usage. The electrical junction box and any
conduit, wire, and fittings required must be provided by the installer.
Use the following procedure to install the AC power wiring:
43 Locate the AC power cable that is provided separately with the Remote.
44 Route the power cable between the AC power port, located on the underside of
the Remote and the nearest AC power junction box as shown below. It may be
necessary to install a new junction box if an existing junction box is not available.
The antenna cable connections must be weather proofed (sealed) for outdoor
installations.
Use extreme caution when working with high voltage AC power. Ensure all power is
disconnected before working on power circuits.
All electrical work must comply with local codes and requirements. A locally licensed
electrical contractor is best qualified to perform this work. For additional information,
consult with the ADC Technical Assistance Center (see Contacting ADC on page 319).
Install the Remote
45 Secure the cable between the AC power port and the AC power junction box per
local practice. Leave sufficient slack in the cable to allow it to be easily connected
and disconnected from the AC power port.
46 Install any AC power supply wires that may be required between the AC junction
box and the AC circuit breaker box.
The power cable is rated for indoor or outdoor use and must not be placed within
electrical conduit as this will impede the cooling of the cable during usage. The cable
run distance to the AC power source must not exceed 100 feet.
It is recommended that an AC outlet be installed near the Remote for powering tools
and test equipment. This outlet must include a GFCI device for protection.
An appropriate disconnect device, as well as branch circuit protection, must be provided
as part of the installation.
Remote enclosure
77073-071
AC power junction box
AC power cable
AC power wires routed
to circuit breaker panel
47 Connect the AC power cable wires to the AC power supply wires. Refer to the
following graphic to identify the color code and wire designations.
48 At the AC box, connect the AC power supply load wires to a circuit breaker or fuse.
49 Connect the ground wire to an approved earth ground.
50 Place the circuit breaker in the ON position and then test the connector end of the
AC power cable for proper voltage levels and correct polarity.
51 When testing is complete, place the circuit breaker in the OFF position.
52 Remove the dust cap from the AC power port located on the bottom of the Remote
as shown below.
For proper and safe equipment operation, an approved earth ground connection must
be provided and maintained.
While trying to connect the AC power cable to the Remote AC power port, it is possible
for the line terminal on the cable connector to contact the ground pin on the power port.
If the AC cable is energized, this will result in a direct short to ground for the AC power.
To avoid possible personal injury and equipment damage, always turn the AC power off
before connecting the AC power cable to the AC power port.
AC power cord
provided with Remote
Black
Green/Yellow
White
Line
Ground
Neutral
120 VAC power
wiring
120 VAC CONNECTIONS
Black
Green/Yellow
White
Line 1
Ground
Line 2
240 VAC power
wiring
240 VAC CONNECTIONS
77073-072
Connector Pin Designations
Pin 1 - Green/Yellow
Pin 2 - White
Pin 3 - Black
End view of
connector
1
2
3
AC power cord
provided with Remote
Install the Remote
53 Connect the power cable connector to the AC power port.
54 Tighten coupling nut until the green band at the top of the connector body is
visible.
NETWORK
AUX.
MOD A
RX1
MOD A
TX0/RX0
FIBER 1
FIBER 2
MOD B
TX0/RX0
MOD B
RX1
MOD C
TX0/RX0
MOD D
TX0/RX0
MOD C
RX1
MOD D
RX1
POWER
100-240 VAC
50-60 Hz
16 AMPS
77073-015
Bottom View
Power
cable
Green band will be
visible when coupling
Nut is tightened
4.3.8 Determine the Circuit Breaker or Fuse for Remote
The Prism Remote supports power input from a 90 to 240 VAC power supply as
shown below.
4.3.8.1 Power Consumption
Do the following to determine the maximum power consumption, which determines
the circuit breaker or fuse to use.
55 Review the Remote order to determine the information listed below and then use
this information to find the power consumption from Table 4-5 and Table 4-6:
RF bandwidth?
DART type (Classic, Single SuperDART or Dual SuperDART)
Diversity or Non- Diversity?
Power module
AC switch
DC switches (4)
Install the Remote
56 Enter the power consumption in the spaces provided below.
57 For the total RF Module power consumption, calculate the power consumption
from Table 4-6 on page 118 for each RF Module present in the Remote (RF Module
A - D), add the Watts, and then enter the total in the Total Power Consumption
field.
58 Divide the total Watts by the input Voltage to determine the current (Amperes)
requirements.
59 Determine the circuit breaker or fuse size based on local codes and practices.
Circuit breaker or fuse size must be 20 Amps or less.
SeRF Module power consumption from Table 4-5 _________Watts
Additional SFPs _____ x 1.25W _________Watts
RF Module A power consumption from Table 4-6 _________Watts
RF Module B power consumption from Table 4-6 _________Watts
RF Module C power consumption from Table 4-6 _________Watts
RF Module D power consumption from Table 4-6 _________Watts
TOTAL POWER CONSUMPTION
_________Watts
Watts
= Amps
Volts
4.3.8.2 Power Consumption Tables
Table 4-5. SeRF Module Power Consumption
SeRF Module
Power Consumption per Module
Nominal (W) @ 25C Maximum (W)
SeRF Module (1 SFP)
[add 1.25W for each SFP added]
36 38
Table 4-6. RF Module Power Consumption
Prism RF Module Description
Power Consumption per Module
Nominal (W)@
25C
Maximum (W)
Single or Dual
SuperDART
RF Module
10W GSM900
Non- Diversity 299 337
Diversity 321 359
15.8W GSM1800 Non- Diversity 299 337
15.8W UMTS Non- Diversity 285 350
20W PCS or 20W AWS Non- Diversity 299 368
Classic DART
RF Module
20W PCS or 20W AWS
Diversity 314 381
6.5W CELL or
6.5W ESMR
Diversity 218 220
20W CELL
Diversity 293 350
Install the Remote
4.3.9 Mount the Remote and Power Up
60 Refer to the detailed instructions for mounting the FlexWave Prism Remote in the
Remote Unit Mounting Kit Installation Instructions (ADCP-77-077) to mount the
Remote in the location selected in Section 4.2, Remote Mounting Plans, on page
94.
61 Power up the Remote by turning its AC power switch to On.
62 Close and tightly secure the Remote door and Solar Shield.
SeRF
Module
AC Power
switch for
Remote
chassis
77073-049
PART III
SYSTEM SETUP AND MANAGEMENT

5
FLEXWAVE ELEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
5.1 FlexWave EMS Overview ...................................................................................124
5.2 EMS Graphical User Interface.............................................................................126
5.3 Product Identity ...............................................................................................127
5.4 EMS Menu Bar .................................................................................................128
5.5 EMS Alarm Indications ......................................................................................129
5.6 EMS System Requirements ................................................................................130
This chapter introduces the ADC FlexWave Prism Element Management System (EMS).
Content Page
FlexWave Element Management System
5.1 FLEXWAVE EMS OVERVIEW
The ADC FlexWave EMS is an embedded software application that is accessed through
an internet connection using a Web browser and provides a Graphical User Interface
(GUI) for control and monitoring of a Prism system.
Figure 5-1. Typical FlexWave Prism System
EMS
IP
IP
Windows 2000 or Windows XP
computer running
Internet Explorer 6.0
WEB
REMOTE
REMOTE
77073-020
HOST
UP TO 8
FlexWave EMS Overview
As shown in Figure 5-2, you access the embedded EMS through the Host, where RF
signals are converted to optical signals for distribution to the local coverage area. The
EMS is thus in a position to monitor both types of signals, and to report status,
alarms, and RF signal levels through automatic, periodic updates and in response to
user requests. User requests can include commands to set RF gain and propagation
delay.
Figure 5-2. The Function of the EMS
HOST
with
Embedded
Element
Management
System
FlexWave
REMOTE BTSs Antennas
RF RF
OPTICAL
WDM
(Optional)
User
Requests
Status
Alarms
RF Signal Levels
77073-021
5.2 EMS GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE
Before you start using the EMS, familiarize yourself with its components.
You use a Web browser to access the EMS Graphical User Interface (GUI). A typical
display consists of the two frames shown in Figure 5-3.
Function Explorer Treeappears in the left frame. Click on a node to open the
corresponding screen.
EMS View Frameappears in the right frame. A typical page contains alarm
indicators, lists of parameter values, and tools such as lists and text boxes that
allow you to set parameter values.
The EMS View Frame includes the EMS Menu bar, which provides access to EMS
configuration or summary windows. For further information on the EMS Menu
bar, see EMS Menu Bar on page 128.
Figure 5-3. EMS Screen Example
Product Identity
5.3 PRODUCT IDENTITY
The FlexWave Prism system comprises a mix of URH Hosts and Prism Remotes. The
system components are therefore identified as follows in the EMS:
Login screensADC FlexWave
Prism&URH
Summary viewsADC FlexWave
Prism&URH
Host viewsADC FlexWave
Prism&URH on Host
Remote views refer to the Remote type:
ADC FlexWave
Prism Remote Unit

ADC FlexWave
URH Remote Unit

5.4 EMS MENU BAR
The EMS Menu bar links (Figure 5-4) perform as described in Table 5-1.
Figure 5-4. EMS Menu Bar
Table 5-1. EMS Menu Bar Links
Link Function
Configuration Opens the General Configuration window from which you set system Auto
refresh. See Setting Auto Refresh on page 167.
Active Alarm List Opens the Active Alarm List window, which is a means to determine alarm type,
Host unit name, Remote name, time stamp, and other information for active
alarms. See Viewing Active Alarms on page 244. The Active Alarm List window
provides a link to the History Log (see Viewing an Alarm History Log on
page 245).
Alarm
Management
Opens the Alarm Management Table, from which you can mask and unmask
alarms. See Masking an Alarm Type on page 246 or Unmasking an Alarm Type
on page 248.
System
Inventory
Opens the System Inventory view, which identifies the main software and
hardware components of the current, working system. See Working with the
System Inventory on page 168.
Help Opens the EMS online help system that provides a description for each node in the
Function Explorer Tree. To access a specific help topic, click on the appropriate
link. (The Help: Overview topic is the default topic.)
About Opens a window that provides the software- release version of the EMS, and
copyright and trademark information.
Logout Logs you out of the EMS.
EMS Alarm Indications
5.5 EMS ALARM INDICATIONS
Some EMS parameter values are associated with alarms. When a parameter enters an
alarm state, an alarm status indicator is activated where the color of the indicates the
alarm severity (Figure 5-5):
Red status indicatormajor alarm
Yellow status indicatorminor alarm
Green status indicatornormal (okay) state
White status indicatora device or component is not communicating, but is in the
EMS database
Grey status indicatoralarm is masked.
Figure 5-5. Example of Alarm Indicators
For further information on EMS alarms, see Managing Alarms on page 243.
5.6 EMS SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The computer that you use to remotely access the EMS must meet the following
minimum requirements:
Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system
Internet Explorer version 6.0. When a direct connection is made, an internet
connection is not needed, but the user interface still displays in a Web browser.
Network Interface Card (NIC)
Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connectors.
The EMS database can also be accessed remotely using an SNMP manager. In this case,
the user interface varies depending on the SNMP manager, but the underlying
parameters, parameter values, and alarms are the same as in the standard EMS
interface.
6
INITIAL PRISM SYSTEM SETUP
6.1 Access the EMS................................................................................................132
6.2 Discover IP Addresses.......................................................................................134
6.3 Enter a Host Name, Clock Source, and Linking Mode .............................................135
6.4 Set the Clock Priority Level ................................................................................138
6.5 Provision the Host SeRF Optical Ports..................................................................139
6.6 Configure the Host DARTs .................................................................................140
6.7 Enter a Remote Name.......................................................................................144
6.8 Configure the Remote SeRF Optical Ports.............................................................146
6.9 Link the Host and Remote DARTs. ......................................................................147
6.9.1 Use of Multi Fibers ....................................................................................147
6.9.2 RF Groups in the Remote and the EMS GUI ..................................................148
6.9.3 Link a Remote DART to a Host DART ...........................................................150
6.10 Conclude Initial System Setup..........................................................................155
6.11 (Optional) Configuring Multi-Host Systems for Manual Mode .................................156
6.11.1 Set the Multi-Host System to Manual Mode.................................................156
6.11.2 Configure the Host DARTs........................................................................156
6.11.3 Configure the Remote DARTs....................................................................161
This chapter guides you through an initial Prism system setup, which requires that
you follow the steps in the order given. There are 42 steps in this process that are
divided into 10 sections.
Content Page
Only a user logged in under the admin account can complete the initial Prism setup
through the EMS.
Initial Prism System Setup
6.1 ACCESS THE EMS
1 Use an Ethernet CAT 5 cable with RJ-45 connectors to connect a laptop to the Craft
port of the Host, as shown in the following figure.
2 Connect your computer and start a Web browser.
3 In the Web browser URL field, enter the following IP address: 192.168.0.1
If you have configured your Prism system with static IP addresses, enter the assigned
IP address instead of 192.168.0.1.
77073-075
RJ-45
Connector
Detail
Access the EMS
4 When the ADC FlexWave Prism&URH Embedded Web Server Welcome window opens:
a In the Username box, type the user name provided by ADC or by the Network
Administrator. The default user name is admin.
b In the Password box, type the password provided by ADC or by the Network
Administrator. The default password is adc123.
5 Click Login. to open the Welcome to ADC FlexWave Prism Embedded Web Server page.
6.2 DISCOVER IP ADDRESSES
6 In the Function Explorer Tree, click on System View to display a system view.
The Alarm Summary view opens in the EMS View Frame. The Alarm Summary IP
Address columns provide the IP address for the Host and Remote. You can use this
IP address to log into the Host and Remote unit through a LAN or WAN
connection.
The Alarm Summary view will display all Remotes connected to the Host, so up to
eight Remotes can be listed. (The number of Remotes listed changes as Remotes
are added or removed from the FlexWave system.)
7 Note the Host IP address for future use: _________________________
8 Note the Remote IP address(es) for future use:
Remote1 _________________________
Remote2 _________________________
Remote3 _________________________
Remote4 _________________________
Remote5 _________________________
Remote6 _________________________
Remote7 _________________________
Remote8 _________________________
Enter a Host Name, Clock Source, and Linking Mode
6.3 ENTER A HOST NAME, CLOCK SOURCE, AND LINKING
MODE
9 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Host-Unknown_HostName to open
the Host Summary view in the EMS View Frame. (For information on the read-only
status indicators in the Host Summary view, see Viewing the Host Summary on
page 202.)
10 In the Host Name box, enter an identifying name for the Host. The Host Name must
be between 5 and 40 characters, with no spaces. The only special character
allowed is an underscore, but it cannot be the first character of the name.
Numerals are allowed, but cannot be the first character of the name.
10
12
13
14
11 and again at 15
11 Click Apply. The new Host Name displays in the Function Explorer Tree and the Host
Summary view as part of the view title and in the Host Name box.
12 In the 10 MHz Reference Clock list, select internal (default) or external. The SeRF
board on each Host and Remote contains the master clock for that unit. At the
Remote, the reference is a clock derived from the Host clock. The 10 MHz Reference
Clock external setting allows you to frequency lock the master clock to an external
10 MHz reference.
You may need to click in the Function Explorer Tree frame and then click Refresh before
the new name appears.
When using the 10 MHz external reference clock, the signal must be connected to the
Host before enabling the clock in the software. If an external 10MHz reference clock is
selected for operation, but is not present or outside of the frequency range of 10MHz
+/ - 5ppm, communication between the Host and Remote over the optical fiber will fail.
Enter a Host Name, Clock Source, and Linking Mode
13 Skip setting the Network Interface parameterdo not change this setting during
this procedure. Refer to Changing to Built-In Network Mode on page 174 for
information on setting the Network Interface.
14 In the Linking Mode list, keep the default setting of Automated. In Automated
Linking mode, the Host passes its DART Pass Band and DART Diversity Status to
connected Remotes. For a Multi-Host system, you must select Manual as this allows
you to manually set DART Pass Band and DART Diversity Status. If you are setting up
a Multi-Host system, leave the Linking Mode set to Automated, complete the initial
setup, and then complete (Optional) Configuring Multi-Host Systems for Manual
Mode on page 156.
15 Click Apply to save the 10 MHz Reference Clock and Linking Mode changes.
6.4 SET THE CLOCK PRIORITY LEVEL
16 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Host-x, SERF (where -x is the Host
name) to open the Prism on SERF of Host-n view in the EMS View Frame.
17 In the Clock Priority Level list, set the Clock Priority Level for the Host. This is in
effect a Master/Slave setting in that the Host in a multi-Host system with the
highest Clock Priority Level (CPL) will provide the Master Clock on the fibers. All
other Hosts and Remotes will recover clocks from higher levels. The highest level
is 1, the lowest level is 14. 0 and 15 are no level settings that results in a zero
pattern being played on the fiber, which effectively shuts it down. The default is
14.
In a Multi-Host system, each Host must have a unique CPL. If one or more Host is
set to the same CPL, an alarm will be generated.
18 Click Apply.
For information on the SeRF alarm indicators, see Viewing the Host SeRF
Summary on page 210.
Provision the Host SeRF Optical Ports
6.5 PROVISION THE HOST SERF OPTICAL PORTS
There can be up to eight Host SeRF optical ports that correspond to the eight physical
ports on the Host. Labeling the Host SeRF Optical Ports provides for easier off-site
management.
19 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Host-x, SERF, Optical Ports (where
-x is the Host name) to open the Optical Ports view for the Host in the EMS View
Frame. The default Optics Name for the Optical ports is UNKNOWN_SFPNAME. (For
information on the status indicators in the Optical Ports view, see Viewing Host
SeRF Optical Ports on page 212.)
20 In the Optics Name box, enter a label for the selected Optics port. The Optics Name
must be between 5 and 32 characters with no spaces. The only special character
allowed is an underscore, but it cannot be the first character of the name.
Numerals are allowed, but cannot be the first character of the name.
21 Select Ip Enable to configure the Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) for exchange of
management traffic. By default Ip Enable is not selected. If Ip Enable is left
unselected, the SFP cannot exchange management traffic. How you set Ip Enable is
dependent on the system configuration:
In a multifiber scenario, do not enable IP on both SFPs from the same Host to
the same Remote. Typically, the first SFP on the Host that goes to that Remote
is used as the IP enabled port for management communications.
In a Multi-Host system, multiple fibers connected to a Remote come from
different Hosts. However, a Remote can accept an IP connection from only one
Host and only one Host can own the Remote for the purposes of provisioning
and monitoring. When a second Host attempts to establish an IP connection,
this second connection fails and an IP Conflict alarm is triggered. You
therefore select Ip Enable only for the Host that manages the Remote so that
only one of the fibers connected to the Remote will have IP.
22 Click Apply.
6.6 CONFIGURE THE HOST DARTS
Configuring a Host DART provides information required for the DART to operate in
RF transmission. Each DART is configured in hardware to operate within a specific RF
band such as PCS or Cellular; the passband is a software-defined sub-band of the
hardware-defined band. Forward and reverse path gain, diversity status, and
operating mode may also be set when a Host DART is configured. The same settings
are applied to the Remote DART when linked to the Host DART. The Host has eight
slots for DART cards.
23 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Host-x, SERF, DARTS (where -x is
the Host name) to open the DARTs Alarm Summary view in the EMS View Frame.
The DARTs Alarm Summary view displays all the Host DARTS that are present,
starting from slot 1 at the top of the list and working sequentially down to last
DART, which can be slots 1-8.
24 In the Information column, click on the Band-Config link for the DART to be
configured.
If you are setting up a multi- host system, go to (Optional) Configuring Multi- Host
Systems for Manual Mode on page 156.
Configure the Host DARTs
25 In the Configuration and Alarm Details of DART n window that opens, set the DART
Attributes:
a In the DART Name box, enter a name for the DART between 5 and 32 characters
with no spaces. The only special character allowed is an underscore, but it
cannot be the first character of the name. Numerals are allowed, but cannot be
the first character of the name.
b In the DART Pass Band (Timeslots) list, select the DART Pass Band to be
supported by this DART. The list will include only those pass bands that are
valid selections for the DART band. For example, if the DART band is
cellular, only cell pass bands are listed.
c In the DART Operating Mode list, select one of the following:
Standbyforces the RF function to be muted in the Host and its linked
Remote.
Normalallows the system to operate normally (RF function not forced to
be muted), assuming all other system components are in proper working
order. (Default setting.)
The mode Undefined is not user selectable, and indicates that the EMS is
unaware of the current mode.
d In the DART Diversity Status list, select nonDiversity or diversity. For a diversity
application, one DART will be configured nonDiversity for the primary
FWD/REV path signal and the other DART will be configured Diversity. This
selection therefore determines whether the DART card being configured will
carry the primary or secondary RF path.
a
b
c
d
e
f
For dual DART configurations, such as dual-pcs, smr800/smr900 and
dual-aws, both DARTs must have DART Diversity Status set to nonDiversity.
e In the DART Forward Gain list, set this value (0 to 31 dB) based upon the fully
loaded forward path signal level from the Base Station. The Host DART expects
signal levels from -25 to +5 dBm. If the fully loaded signal is +5 dBm, then the
DART forward gain should be set to 0 dB, if the fully loaded signal is -25 dBm,
then the DART Forward Gain should be set to 30 dB. The equation is:
DART Forward Gain = 5 - fullyLoadedBasestationSignal.
f Set the DART Reverse Gain value to achieve the required gain from the input to
the Remote to the output of the Host DART. The range is:
5 to 36 dB for Cellular, SMR800, SMR900, Narrowband PCS & Narrowband
AWS DARTs
0 to 31 dB for Fullband GSM1800, UMTS, Fullband AWS, and EGSM900
The diversity status of the Host DART will extend to the Remote DART connected to it.
For further information, see Link the Host and Remote DARTs. on page 147.
If you are setting up the system when no calls are going through, you must allow
headroom for a fully loaded forward path. For CDMA protocols, the difference from
unloaded to fully loaded is typically 8dB, so if the unloaded signal is - 15dBm, then the
fully loaded input would be - 7 dBm and the Host Forward Gain should be set to 5- (- 7)
= 12 dB.
The same rules applies for GSM carriers, except that the unloaded to loaded is
determined by the equation 10*log10(# RF Channels). So if there are 4 GSM RF Channels,
then the loaded forward path is 6 dB above unloaded.
If sufficient headroom is not present, then the LPA can be over- powered causing a Loss
Of Service.
When configured correctly, the Host DART Forward input can handle peaks of 14dB
above the BTS signal level. For example, if the fully loaded CDMA carrier is - 25dBm, then
peaks up to - 11 dBm can be handled (CDMA peak to average is typically 10- 12 dB). If
the peaks exceed the 14 dB of headroom, then Automatic Level Control (ALC) will occur
to prevent over- driving the A/ D Converter.
Configure the Host DARTs
When setting the DART Reverse Gain value, the following rules must be
observed:
n The DART Reverse Gain setting can be used to overcome losses from the Host
DART to the BTS. If you want unity reverse path gain and the losses to the
BTS are 20 dB, then the Reverse Gain should be set to 20 dB.
n If you want to match the URH noise floor to the BTS noise floor, then the
noise floors for both the URH and the BTS must be known. Use the DART
Reverse Gain to match these to optimize the reverse path. For example, if the
BTS has a noise floor of -114 dBm/30 kHz and the URH has a single Remote
noise floor of -124 dBm/30kHz, and there is 2 dB of loss from the Host
DART to the BTS, then the Reverse path gain should be set to 12 dB.
n Simulcast changes the actual REV gain level by 20log(n) where n = the
number of simulcast links. For example, if REV gain is set to 10dB in a 2:1
simulcast configuration, the actual REV gain is only 4dB (10dB - 6dB). If REV
gain is set to 20dB in a 4:1 simulcast, the actual gain is 8dB (20dB - 12dB).
The Noise Floor of the URH goes up of 10*log10(n), where n = simulcast #.
For example, the single node Remote noise floor is -124 dBm/30kHz
(Before any Reverse path gain), then the noise floor for two remotes is -121
dBm, for 4 remotes it is -118 dBm/30kHz and for 8 remotes it is -115 dBm.
n Dual PCS uplink splitting causes a 3 dB degradation in the noise figure.
26 Click Apply and then Close.
6.7 ENTER A REMOTE NAME
A Remote becomes known to the EMS when an optical fiber is connected from the
Host to the Remote and IP has been enabled as described in Provision the Host SeRF
Optical Ports on page 139. The Remote appears as Remote_Unknown_RmtName in the
the EMS Function Explorer Tree of functions and can be renamed using the following
procedure.
Remotes are assigned a number from 1 through 8 that correspond to the physical SFP
port assignment on the Host. For example, SFP port 3 is Remote3.
27 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x (where
Remote# indicates the Remote number that corresponds to a Host SFP port
number and n is the Remote name). Remote-Unknown_RmtName is the default
Remote name until it is user-defined.
The Remote Unit view opens in the EMS View Frame. (For information on the alarms
shown in the Remote Unit view, see Monitoring a Remote Unit on page 226.)
Enter a Remote Name
28 In the Remote Name box, enter a name for the Remote. The Remote Name must be
between 5 and 40 characters with no spaces. The only special character allowed is
an underscore, but it cannot be the first character of the name. Numerals are
allowed, but cannot be the first character of the name.
29 Click Apply.
The new Remote Name is shown in the in the Function Explorer Tree and the Remote
Unit view.
6.8 CONFIGURE THE REMOTE SERF OPTICAL PORTS
30 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, SERF, Optical
Ports (where Remote# indicates the Remote number that corresponds to a Host SFP
port number and n is the Remote name).
The Optical Ports view for the selected Remote opens in the EMS View Frame.
31 In the Optics Name box, enter a label for the port that is between 5 and 32
characters with no spaces. The only special character allowed is an underscore,
but it cannot be the first character of the name. Numerals are allowed, but cannot
be the first character of the name.
32 Click Apply.
For information on the optical port indicators, see Viewing Remote SeRF Optical Ports on
page 234.
The Ip Enable field is not selectable for Remotes as it is configured at the Host SeRF
SFPs. Its inclusion in this view is to indicate which Remote SFP has IP on it. For
information on Ip Enable alarms, see Viewing Host SeRF Optical Ports on page 212.
Link the Host and Remote DARTs.
6.9 LINK THE HOST AND REMOTE DARTS.
Linking establishes an association in software between a particular Host DART and
a particular Remote DART, enabling the two DARTs to act as an operational unit in
providing one RF band. There are four pre-requisites to this procedure:
The Host DART and Remote DART must be connected through the optical fiber
and be communicating with each other.
The Host DART card must be configured as described in Configure the Host
DARTs on page 140.
The Host and Remote DARTs must be of the same type (such as, Cellular or PCS).
There must be a sufficient number of fiber timeslots available in order to
accommodate the requested passband (for example, PCS A band requires 3
timeslots).
In the Remote DART configuration page, all Host DARTs are listed that have the same
band as the Remote DART. A link is established by selecting a Host DART to be paired
with the Remote DART.
6.9.1 Use of Multi Fibers
The EMS provides the ability to install multi fibers between a Host and Remote. This
means that, in addition to the minimum two fibers (RX and TX) in the Host to Remote
connection, one or more additional fiber pairs are installed. This is done to increase
the bandwidth between the Host and Remote. Each fiber pair can handle
approximately 75 Mbps of RF bandwidth.
Each fiber is capable of supporting 12 TDM timeslots:
Classic DARTs or Single SuperDARTs support up to 35 MHz of RF
Cellular
SMR800
SMR900
PCS Narrowband
AWS Narrowband
EGSM900
Dual SuperDARTs support up to 75 MHz of RF
GSM1800
UMTS
AWS Fullband
If you are setting up a multi- host system, go to (Optional) Configuring Multi- Host
Systems for Manual Mode on page 156.
When a Host DART is linked to a Remote DART in a multi-fibers configuration, the
EMS uses the first fiber (in numerical order) on which the required number of
timeslots is available for the passband being linked. The EMS will not divide up the
timeslots between two fibers. So, for example, if the passband requires eight
timeslots, and only six timeslots are available on the first fiber, the EMS will bypass
the first fiber and assign all eight timeslots to the second fiber, leaving four timeslots
unused on the second fiber.
6.9.2 RF Groups in the Remote and the EMS GUI
The EMS Alarm Summary of RF Groups view displays up to four rectangles labeled RF
Module / Band N (where N equals A, B, C, or D). Each rectangle represents one RF Module
in the Remote. Figure 6-1 shows how the FlexWave EMS maps the RF Modules in the
GUI to the physical modules and antennas.
Figure 6-1. Matching Remote RF Modules to EMS Group Labels
Figure 6-2 shows the Alarm Summary of RF Groups view. If a slot is not occupied by an
RF Module, the slot is shown with a white indicator.
MOD A
MOD B
MOD C
MOD D
Remote
RF Module
shelf labels
EMS
RF Module
labels
Figure 6-2. Alarm Summary of RF Groups View
Figure 6-3 provides a close up view of the Slot 2 panel in the Alarm Summary of RF
Groups view where:
a: DCS FULLBAND12 indicates that a 12-slot DCS FullBand DART is plugged into
band1.
b: An expander for the DCS FullBand DART is plugged into band2 and therefore is
represented with a White indicator to indicate that a configurable DART is not
present.
Figure 6-3. RF Groups in the FlexWave EMS
6.9.3 Link a Remote DART to a Host DART
33 Verify that the Host DART is configured as described in Configure the Host
DARTs on page 140.
34 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, SERF, RF
Groups (where Remote# indicates the Remote number that corresponds to a Host
SFP port number and n is the Remote name) to open the Alarm Summary of RF Groups
view (see Figure 6-2 on page 149).
35 In the rectangle for the RF group selected, click on the config link for the band
being linked to open a Configuration Details window that corresponds to the
selected link.
The table at the bottom of the Configuration Details window indicates which Host
Unit DART is available for use in linking. In this example, the display indicates
that Host DART ID 1 (top row, circled in red) is assigned to DCS Full Band.
This procedure requires that the antenna has been connected and the system is ready
to transmit RF. For information on connecting the antenna, see Antenna Cable
Installation on page 110.
The Configuration Details table has the following columns:
Host DART IdSlot number of slot occupied by the Host DART card. The Host
has eight slots numbered from 1 to 8, read from top to bottom. If the Host
DART is a 12-Timeslot DART, then only the first of the two slots it occupies
will be shown (for example, if the Host 12-Timeslot DART occupies slots 1 and
3, only slot 1 will be shown).
Host DART SFP IdPort number of physical optical port where Host-Remote
optical fiber is connected on the Host.
Host DART BandFrequency band of the Host DART. This field is not
configurable and reports the DART type (such as, cellular, pcs, and so forth).
Host DART Pass BandPassband assigned to the specified Host DART.
Host DART StatusSystem entered status of Host DART card. This will be active,
standby, or not in service
Remote DART IdNumber (1-8) indicating the physical location where this
DART card is mounted in the Remote; see RF Groups in the Remote and the
EMS GUI on page 148) for an explanation of how the Remote DARTs are
numbered.
Remote DART SFP IdShows the available Remote SFPs that can be used to link
the DARTs. 1 is shown in this example, so the Remote has fibers connected to
this Host using Remote SFP 1. If there are two or more sets of SFPs connected
between the same Host DART and Remote DART, this field will contain a value
such as 2/3 or 2/3/4 where each one-digit number represents one Remote
optical port where an SFP is connected for this Host/Remote pair. Each set of
one Host SFP and one Remote SFP supports two optical fibers (RX and TX), each
with a capacity of 12 TDM timeslots
Remote DART StatusSystem entered status of Remote DART card, which can
be active or unlink
Decommission buttonused to clean out settings and information for
hardware that has been removed.
LPA Reset buttonWhen clicked, causes the LPA to reset as described in
Restarting an LPA on page 222.
36 To link the Host DART to the Remote DART for this pass band, click in the radio
button next to Host DART Id (ID 1 in this example).
37 Click Apply. The following example shows the completed link (in this case, Host
DART SFP Id 8 has been selected).
38 Set the LPA Operating Mode to normal.
If multi fibers are connected between the Host and Remote, the system will try the fibers
in numerical sequence until a link can be established for the identified passband. If no
fiber is available providing the number of TDM timeslots required for the passband, an
error message is returned indicating that DART linking failed due to a problem on the
host.
If adding a link to an existing simulcast connection, the system requires the use of the
same timeslots. If the timeslots aren't available, the system returns the following error
message: DART linking failed due to a problem on the host.
As soon as you set the LPA Operating Mode to normal, RF transmission will start. Before
you set the LPA Operating Mode to normal, make sure that the antenna has been
connected and the system is ready to transmit RF. For information on connecting the
antenna, see Antenna Cable Installation on page 110.
39 In the DART Forward Gain list, select the dB (0 to 31), which is the actual gain, not
attenuation, that will be applied to the RF forward path signal (where 0 = 0 dB gain,
1 = 1 dB gain, and so forth) The DART Forward Gain is based on the EIRP desired
at the antenna. You therefore need to know how much cable, insertion, and any
other loss (such as splitters) exist between the Remote and the antenna. Set the
DART Forward Gain to achieve the required output power level to meet the EIRP of
your RF link budget.
The following table provides calculations you need to set the gains to achieve the
desired Output power for a single-DART configuration.
For dual-DART configurations, you need to reduce each path by 3dB at the Remote
DART Forward Gain. For example, for a DART Input Level of -25dBm, the Host FWD
Gain setting would be 31dB and the Remote FWD Gain setting would be 28dB.
DART
Input
Level
Host
DART
Fwd Gain
Remote
DART
Fwd Gain
Expected Output
(in dBm)
20W
DART
6.5W
DART
- 25 31 31 43 38
- 25 31 0 12 7
+6 0 31 43 38
+6 0 0 12 7
40 In the DART Forward Delay box, set in microseconds the actual delay that will be
applied to the RF forward path signal. The minimum delay required is calculated.
The acceptable range of delays is 88us. If you attempt to set the delay to a value
outside the allowed range, the DART uses either the minimum or maximum,
dependant on whether the DART is exceeding the set delay (too high or low).
Be aware of simulcast links. Observe the minimum delay required for the longest
link, and set the delay to the same value for all simulcast nodes in the same
connection based on this value.
Here is an example:
Fiber has 8 usec per mile of fiber.
Remote 1 has 5 miles of fiber (40 usec of fiber delay).
Remotes are set to Cellular A"/A Band which has 8 usec of system delay. The
delay ranges will therefore be:
Remote 1 delay (48-136)
The system calculates these delay valuesthis is a typical example based on the fiber
lengths provided. You select a delay value thats within the range calculated by the
system.
Set the delays to the same values for all nodes in the network in order to:
Optimize simulcast
Make BTS datafill changes simple (same delay offsets for all nodes)
Simplify E-911 integration (same delay offsets for all nodes)
Delays cannot be shortened; they can only be lengthened. The recommended
approach is to normalize all Remotes to the longer minimum delay. In this
example the delay would therefore have to be 88 usec.
41 In the DART Reverse Delay box, set in microseconds the actual delay that will be
applied to the RF reverse path signal. The actual delay of the RF path will be within
1 usec. For E-911 TDOA applications, the reverse path delay must be measured to
achieve the +/- 50 nsec delay accuracy specified for DAS networks. The FWD and
REV delay values are usually the same because the fiber path between the two is
typically the same.
42 Click Apply.
Conclude Initial System Setup
6.10 CONCLUDE INITIAL SYSTEM SETUP
The FlexWave system is now ready for use and further configuration as described in
this document.
The default admin user account has unrestricted access to all EMS user accounts and
management capabilities. To protect against unauthorized access to the Prism network,
as soon as possible, the user assigned the admin role should follow the process
described Changing Your Own Password on page 196 to change the password for the
default admin user.
6.11 (OPTIONAL) CONFIGURING MULTI-HOST SYSTEMS
FOR MANUAL MODE
When the Prism system is set to Automated linking mode, you establish a link in the
Configuration Details window by selecting the Host DART to link to and then clicking
Apply (see Link a Remote DART to a Host DART on page 150). The link is then
established on both the Host and Remote ends, using the fiber and the timeslots that
are automatically selected by the FlexWave EMS. The Remote DART also automatically
adopts the Host DART's pass band and diversity setting.
Multi-Host systems must be set to Manual linking mode so each side of the link (Host
and Remote) can be established independently. The Network Administrator must also
manually specify the fiber, timeslots, pass band, and diversity status for each end.
There is no system crosscheck to validate the selectionsso the setup described in
this section should be performed only by an administrator who is very familiar with
the concepts involved.
6.11.1 Set the Multi-Host System to Manual Mode
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Host-Unknown_HostName to open
the Host Summary view in the EMS View Frame. (For information on the read-only
status indicators in the Host Summary view, see Viewing the Host Summary on
page 202.)
2 In the Linking Mode list, select Manual.
3 Click Apply.
6.11.2 Configure the Host DARTs
The DARTs Alarm Summary view displays all the Host DARTS that are present,
starting from slot 1 at the top of the list and working sequentially down to last
DART, which can be slots 1-8.
configured.
You can only switch between the Automated and Manual modes when there are no active
links in the system. Once a link is established the mode is locked and selections in the
Linking Mode list are disabled. All active links must be unlinked to enable the selections
in the Linking Mode list.
(Optional) Configuring Multi-Host Systems for Manual Mode
6 In the Configuration and Alarm Details of DART n window that opens, set the DART
Attributes. The table at the bottom of the Configuration and Alarm Details of DART n
window shows how many SFPs have been discovered that are available for
linkingtheir corresponding timeslots are blank.
c In the New Link list, select the SFP ID for the fiber to be used to communicate
with the Remote for the DART's RF. Only the IDs of fiber with enough available
contiguous timeslots for the selected passband will be available in the New Link
list. The table in the lower part of the screen shows which fibers are available
and which timeslots on the fibers are in use. Be careful to select a fiber to the
Remote to which you want to link.
d In the Timeslots list, select the timeslots on the fiber that will carry the RF. The
Timeslots list displays the range of timeslots that can be usedonly unused
timeslots will be available for selection. If the DART is already linked to a
Remote, the Timeslots list comprises the timeslots being used for that previous
link. If you are linking to more than one Remote, the same timeslots must be
used on all fibers for this DART.
e In the DART Operating Mode list, select one of the following:
Remote.
f In the DART Diversity Status list, select nonDiversity or diversity. For a diversity
g In the DART Forward Gain list, set this value (0 to 31 dB) based upon the fully
The diversity status of the Host DART will not extend to the Remote DART connected to
it. You must explicitly configure the Remote DART to have the same diversity status as
the Host DART.
= 12 dB.
Of Service.
7 Click Apply.
8 Click Close.
6.11.3 Configure the Remote DARTs
9 Login to the web server on the Host that is managing the Remote (that is, the Host
has IP enabled to the remote). This may be the Host you are currently logged into
or could be a different Host in the Multi-Host group.
SFP port number and n is the Remote name) to open the Alarm Summary of RF Groups
view (see Figure 6-2 on page 149).
being linked to open a Configuration Details window that corresponds to the
selected link.
12 In the Configuration Details of DART n on RemoteN window that opens, set the DART
Attributes. The table at the bottom of the Configuration and Alarm Details of DART n
window shows how many SFPs have been discovered that are available for
linkingtheir corresponding timeslots are blank.
c In the New Link list, select the SFP that you want to link.
d In the Timeslots list, select the timeslot for the SFP. If the DART is already
linked, the Timeslots list is read-only and displays the range of timeslots
occupied by the DART.
e In the DART Operating Mode list, select one of the following:
Remote.
f In the DART Diversity Status list, select nonDiversity or diversity. For a diversity
To unlink a Host DART from a Remote, click on the checkbox in the fiber timeslot table
for the Remote being unlinked, and then click Apply.
g In the DART Forward Gain list, set this value (0 to 31 dB) based upon the fully
h In the DART Forward Delay box, set in microseconds the actual delay that will be
applied to the RF forward path signal. The minimum delay required is
calculated. The acceptable range of delays is 88us. If you attempt to set the
delay to a value outside the allowed range, the DART uses either the minimum
or maximum, dependant on whether the DART is exceeding the set delay (too
high or low).
Be aware of simulcast links. Observe the minimum delay required for the
longest link, and set the delay to the same value for all simulcast nodes in the
same connection based on this value.
Here is an example:
Fiber has 8 usec per mile of fiber.
The diversity status, fiber, and timeslots of the Host DART must match the Remote
DART linked to it.
= 12 dB.
Of Service.
Remotes are set to Cellular A"/A Band which has 8 usec of system delay.
The delay ranges will therefore be:
The system calculates these delay valuesthis is a typical example based
on the fiber lengths provided. You select a delay value thats within the
range calculated by the system.
Set the delays to the same values for all nodes in the network in order to:
Optimize simulcast
Make BTS datafill changes simple (same delay offsets for all nodes)
Simplify E-911 integration (same delay offsets for all nodes)
Delays cannot be shortened; they can only be lengthened. The
recommended approach is to normalize all Remotes to the longer
minimum delay. In this example the delay would therefore have to be 88
usec.
i In the DART Reverse Delay box, set in microseconds the actual delay that will be
applied to the RF reverse path signal. The actual delay of the RF path will be
within 1 usec. For E-911 TDOA applications, the reverse path delay must be
measured to achieve the +/- 50 nsec delay accuracy specified for DAS
networks. The FWD and REV delay values are usually the same because the
fiber path between the two is typically the same.
13 Click Apply.
14 Click Close.
To unlink the Remote DART, click on the checkbox in the fiber timeslot table (at the
bottom of the window) in the Unlink column and then click Apply.
7
USING THE EMS TO MANAGE A PRISM
SYSTEM
7.1 Displaying the System View...............................................................................166
7.2 Setting Auto Refresh.........................................................................................167
7.3 Working with the System Inventory ....................................................................168
7.3.1 System Inventory View Components ...........................................................168
7.3.1.1 System Inventory and Host Inventory Tables........................................169
7.3.1.2 Remote Inventory Tables ...................................................................170
7.4 Working with Prism System Network Interfaces....................................................172
7.4.1 Changing to Built-In Network Mode.............................................................174
7.4.2 EMS Access Methods.................................................................................176
7.4.2.1 Accessing the EMS Through the Remote Network Port............................177
7.4.2.2 Accessing the EMS Through the Remote Craft Port ................................180
Content Page
Using the EMS to Manage a Prism System
7.1 DISPLAYING THE SYSTEM VIEW
In the Function Explorer Tree, click on System View to open the system view, which is
labeled as the Alarm Summary, in the EMS View Frame.
The Alarm Summary provides a top-level view of the Prism system, which identifies the
Host and all Remotes known to the EMS by their IP addresses and provides a
summary alarm status indicator for each unit.
Host Unit Namename entered by user or Unknown_HostName if no name has been
entered. Current summary alarm state of Host is indicated by status indicator in
same row.
Alarm Summary indicatorindicates if the state of the unit:
Green indicates a Normal state
Yellow indicates that a Minor alarm is active, and is the highest-level active
alarm
Red indicates that a Major alarm is active.
Remote Unit Namename entered by user or Unknown_RmtName if no name has
been entered. Summary alarm state is indicated by status indicator in same row.
IP Address (Host/Remote)IP Address of the Host/Remote. If logged into a Remote
that is not connected to a Host, the Host IP Address will appear as
NOT_CONNECTED, and the Remote IP Address will appear as 0.0.0.0 if the remote
is setup for DHCP. If a static IP address has been assigned to the Remote, the
actual IP address for the Remote will display when the Host is not connected.
Setting Auto Refresh
7.2 SETTING AUTO REFRESH
Auto Refresh is intended for use after the Prism system has been configured during
initial setup and you want to monitor system performance without having to trigger
manual page refreshes.
1 In the EMS Menu bar, click Configuration.
The General Configuration window opens.
2 In the Auto Refresh list, select yes to set the EMS pages to auto refresh.
3 In the Auto Refresh Time box, enter the number of seconds (1 - 1800) between EMS
auto refreshes.
4 Click Apply.
Only a user logged in under the admin or a Network Manager account can change Prism
settings through the EMS.
Do not set Auto Refresh until after the initial Prism system setup described in Initial
Prism System Setup on page 131. If you apply Auto Refresh before initial system setup,
entered configurations can be lost.
7.3 WORKING WITH THE SYSTEM INVENTORY
The System Inventory view identifies the main software and hardware components of
the current, working system.
1 To open the System Inventory view, in the EMS Menu bar, click System Inventory.
2 Confirm that the Host and its Remotes are operating at the same software revision
by looking at the values displayed in the Compact Flash SwVer column.
3 Confirm that all installed devices are displayed in the Hardware Inventory table:
Host
SeRFs
DART
System card
Remotes
One RSI per connected Remote
One SeRF per connected Remote
Remote RF Modules
One RDI
Power Detector
One or two DARTs, depending on configuration.
One or two LNAs, depending on configuration.
7.3.1 System Inventory View Components
The System Inventory view is a too long to present in one graphic. This document
therefore presents the System Inventory view in two sections:
System Inventory and Host Inventory Tables on page 169 describes the two
tables at the top of the view.
Remote Inventory Tables on page 170 describes the tables at the bottom of the
view.
Working with the System Inventory
7.3.1.1 System Inventory and Host Inventory Tables
Figure 7-1. System Inventory and Host Inventory Tables
The System Inventory table provides the following information:
UnitHost or Remote name
Module TypeHost or Remote as listed in the row labeled as Host or Remote
Linux Kernel VerVersion of the Linux Kernel on the Host or Remote
Boot Loader VerVersion of the Boot Loader on the Host or Remote
Compact Flash SwVerVersion of the Compact Flash (Host or Remote, refer to the
row labeled for the Host or Remote). The version of the Compact Flash drives all
other software versions.
FPGA VerVersion of the FPGA on the Host or Remote SeRF (refer to the row
labeled for the Host or Remote)
Agent SwVerVersion of the Agent on the Host or Remote (refer to the row labeled
for the Host or Remote)
HWMon SwVerSoftware Version of the Hardware Monitor process running on the
Host or Remote
APPMon SwVerSoftware Version of the Application Monitor process running on
the Host or Remote
MATEMon SwVerSoftware Version of the Mate Monitor process running on the
Host or Remote
ENETMon SwVerSoftware Version of the Ethernet Monitor process running on the
Host or Remote
FPGAMon SWVerSoftware Version of the FPGA Monitor process running on the
Host or Remote
The Host table provides the following information:
TitleName of the Host in the format of Host: HostName (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) where:
HostName is the default or user-assigned name for the Host
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the Host IP address
Module TypeType of module (such as SeRF, DART).
Date CodeDate code for the module
Hw VerVersion of the module hardware
Serial NumberUnique serial number for the module
Part NumberADC part number for the module
7.3.1.2 Remote Inventory Tables
Figure 7-2. Remote Inventories
Working with the System Inventory
The Remote Inventory tables, of which there can be up to eight, comprise the following
information:
TitleName of the Remote in the format of Remote: RemoteName (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx),
where
RemoteName is the default or user-assigned name for the Remote
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the Remote IP address
Module TypeType of module (such as LNA, SeRF, DART).
Date CodeDate code for the module
Hw VerVersion of the module hardware
Serial NumberUnique serial number for the module
Part NumberADC part number for the module
7.4 WORKING WITH PRISM SYSTEM NETWORK
INTERFACES
You use the EMS to configure the Prism system for one of the two different modes
listed below, which affects how you configure the network interface of the Network
and Craft ports and how you access the system through the EMS. In each mode, the
Host and its subtended Remotes require the same configuration. Both modes require
a DHCP server, which assigns an IP address to the Host and its subtended Remotes.
External Network modeis the default mode. The Host and subtended Remotes are
DHCP clients and expect IP addresses to be assigned by an external DHCP server
through a network Ethernet connector. If there is no external DHCP server, the
Host will not be able to communicate with any connected Remotes.
The Host Craft port has a DHCP server that you can use to communicate with the
Host directly. The IP address for the Host Craft port is 192.168.0.1. You can access
the EMS via the Craft port, but if the Network port is not connected to an external
DHCP server, the Remotes will not be visible to you.
Built-in Network modeBuilt-In Network mode is best suited for when there is no
network to connect to or if the Prism network does not have a DHCP server. In
Built-In Network mode, the functionality of the Network port and the Craft port
are swapped. You connect a laptop to the Host Network port, which is assigned a
default fixed IP address of 10.0.0.1 and all subtended network interfaces obtain a
DHCP address in this same subnet. Alternatively, in Built-In Network mode you
can connect the Craft port to an external DHCP server from which the Craft port
obtains its IP address.
Table 7-1 describes how the system mode affects the IP address for the Host and
subtended Remotes.
Static ModeYou also have the option of giving the devices on your Prism system static
IP addresses. Contact ADC for further information (see Contacting ADC on page 319).
There are potential problems in switching between the External Network and Built- In
Network modes. If cabled incorrectly your DHCP server could provide private IP
addresses on a public network. Set the Prism system mode once and then do not change
it.
Working with Prism System Network Interfaces
Table 7-1. Prism System Modes and IP Addresses
Mode
Host IP Addresses Remote IP Addresses
Craft Port Network Port Craft Port Network Port
External Network DHCP server
assigns IP
addresses in the
192.168.0.x range.
For direct access to
the Host through
the EMS, in a Web
browser enter the IP
address
192.168.0.1
(http:/ / 192.168.0.
1)
The Host Network
port is a DHCP
client and must be
connected to a
network with a
DHCP server to
obtain an IP
address.
the Host through
the EMS, in a Web
address assigned
by the DHCP server.
For information on
discovering the IP
address, see the
DHCP server or
connect to the EMS
using the craft port
and bring up the
System View.
Remote Craft port
IP address is
192.168.0.1.
However, you
cannot get direct
access to the Host
or the network
from the Remote
Craft port. You get
read- only view to
Remote
configuration.
The Remote
network port
obtains its IP
address from the
external DHCP
server.
You can reach the
Remote via telnet
or ssh from the
Host.
Built-In Network DHCP client must
be connected to a
network with a
DHCP server to
obtain an IP
address. The IP
address can then
be used by HTTP
and SNMP to
connect to the
Host.
The Network port is
a DHCP server with
a fixed IP address
of 10.0.0.1 and
assigns IP
addresses in the
10.0.0.x range to
subtended
Remotes.
the Host through
the EMS, in a Web
address
10.0.0.1
(http:/ / 10.0.0.1)
Remote Craft port
IP address is
192.168.0.1.
However, you
cannot get direct
access to the Host
or the network
from the Remote
Craft port. You get
read- only view to
Remote
configuration.
The Remote
Network port is a
LAN/ WAN
connection to the
network to which
the Host Network
port is connected.
The Remote
Network port
therefore obtains
an IP address in the
10.0.0.x range
from the DHCP
server in the Host.
You can reach the
Remote via telnet
or ssh from the
Host.
7.4.1 Changing to Built-In Network Mode
Built-In Network mode allows all Remotes to be assigned an IP address to allow
communication without the need for an external DHCP router. You therefore set the
Prism system to Built-In Network mode if there is no network to connect to or if the
network does not have a DHCP server. You would also change the Prism system to
Built-In Network mode if you intend to transition to static IP addresses.
1 To open the Host Summary view in the EMS View Frame, in the Function Explorer
Tree select System View, and then click on the Host name node.
2 Set Network Interface to Built-In Network. This sets the Network port on the Host to
the IP address 10.0.0.1 and starts a DHCP server on the Host that will provide IP
addresses to connected Remotes. Built-In Network mode also causes the Host
Craft port to run a DHCP client instead of using the IP address 192.168.0.1.
3 Click Apply.
settings through the EMS.
When changing from External Network mode to Built- In Network mode, if the Prism
system is cabled incorrectly, the Prism DHCP server could broadcast private IP
addresses on a public network. You should therefore only change the mode once,
preferably during setup.
4 In the confirmation dialog, click OK. Your current EMS session will close down as
the IP addressing and configuration will have been modified.
5 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the Host Craft port and connect it to the Host
Network port.
22403-A
RJ-45
CONNECTOR
DETAIL
6 Connect the free end of the Ethernet cable to the computers port. Leave your
computer in DHCP mode. It will automatically receive an IP address in the
10.0.0.0/24 subnet from the Host Network port.
7 Open a Web browser and in its URL field, enter the Host IP address: 10.0.0.1
8 When the Connect to dialog opens:
a Enter the User name provided by ADC or by the Network Administrator. The
default is admin.
b Enter the Password provided by ADC or by the Network Administrator. The
default is adc123.
9 Click OK. The Welcome to ADC FlexWave Prism Embedded Web Server page opens.
7.4.2 EMS Access Methods
The FlexWave EMS has four access methods that are listed below and as shown and
numbered in Figure 7-3.
1 A laptop subtended to the Craft port on the Host provides direct access to the
EMS. In this scenario the Host and the Remote can be configured and monitored
through the EMS. This is the default access scenario during initial configuration
and commissioning as described in Access the EMS on page 132.
2 A personal computer with a Web browser connected through the internet or
intranet to the Network port on the Host. This method provides a remote user
access to the EMS through a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network
(WAN). In this scenario the Host and subtended Remotes can be configured and
monitored through the EMS. After initial system setup, this is the default access
method.
3 A personal computer with a Web browser connected to the Network port on the
Remote provides a remote user a LAN connection to the Host network interface,
which provides access to the EMS. See Accessing the EMS Through the Remote
Network Port on page 177.
It can take a while for the system to update the interfaces (can be up to 30 minutes, but
typically is no more than 10 minutes). If the Remotes already have a DHCP IP address
from an external network and you change it to built- in (in a different subnet), it can take
30 minutes for the Remote to request an update from an external IP address to the
10.0.0.x IP address. During this transient period, there will not be communication with
the Remotes.
The Host will also take awhile to change from an external IP address to the 10.0.0.1 Ip
address, so a period of no communication with the Host can be expected as well.
EMS Access Methods 1 and 2 are true for the default External Network mode described
in this chapter. If your Prism system is set to Built- in Network mode, then the
definitions for EMS Access Methods 1 and 2 for the Host Network and Craft ports are
are switched.
4 A laptop subtended to the Remote Craft port provides access to the EMS. In this
scenario, Remote configuration interfaces can be viewed in Read-Only format. The
Host configuration interfaces are disabled and cannot be viewed. See Accessing
the EMS Through the Remote Craft Port on page 180.
Figure 7-3. Four Points of EMS Access
7.4.2.1 Accessing the EMS Through the Remote Network Port
The Remote provides a Network port allowing communications with the internal
processor and transfer of service data to the optical protocol allowing IP servicing
between the Host and Remote(s). This port is customer accessible for monitoring the
interface with the subtended Host and ENET subtended devices at the Remote. The
Network port is 10/100/1000 BASE-T MDI and requires a minimum of CAT 5 cable.
The network cable must be terminated with a hardened RJ-45 male connector for
connection to the Network port. The maximum cable length is 300 feet (91.4 m).
Use the following procedure to install the Network cable and then log in to the EMS.
Although the Network port on the Remote is a GigE port, the available bandwidth is only
100Mbps (part of this bandwidth is used for system management services).
You cannot dedicate a full 100Mbps of bandwidth for external ethernet services off the
Remotes Network port. For example, if connecting a WiFi access point to the Remotes
Network port, you need to reduce the available bandwidth to less than 100Mbps (such
as, 50Mbps).
Host Unit
with EMS
Craft port Network port
Network port
IP
IP
IP
IP
2
Network
(LAN or WAN)
1
3
4
Remote
Unit
Craft port
75356-04
1 Remove the dust cap from the RJ-45 connector located at the bottom of the
Remote as shown below.
2 Route the network cable from the network connection to the underside of the
Remote.
3 Align the plug end of the RJ-45 cable connector with the RJ-45 port receptacle and
then insert the cable plug into the port receptacle.
4 Slide the connector nut up to the port until it engages the connector locking
mechanism.
5 Tighten the connector nut in a clockwise direction (if necessary, use a wrench or
pliers to grip the connector nut) until it snaps past the indented position and
locks into place. It may be necessary to apply 30 to 50 in-lbs (3.4 to 5.6 Nm) of
torque to the connector nut in order to turn it past the indented position.
It may be necessary to apply 30 to 50 lbs/ force- inches (3.4 to 5.6 Nm) of torque to the
connector nut in order to turn it past the indented position.
NETWORK
AUX.
MOD A
RX1
MOD A
TX0/RX0
FIBER 1
FIBER 2
MOD B
TX0/RX0
MOD B
RX1
MOD C
TX0/RX0
MOD D
TX0/RX0
MOD C
RX1
MOD D
RX1
POWER
100-240 VAC
50-60 Hz
16 AMPS
RJ-45 Network
Connector port
Network cable
Connector nut
RJ-45 plug
Bottom View
77073-010
7 In the URL field for the Web browser, enter the IP address of the EMS Host:
If the Prism system is set to External Network mode, enter IP Address obtained
from the DHCP server. (Your computer also receives an IP address from the
external DHCP server connected to the Host.
If the Prism system is set to Built-In Network mode, enter 10.0.0.1 . (The
Remote Network port is a LAN extension from the Host Network port. Your
computer receives an IP address in the 10.0.0.0/24 subnet from the Host.)
8 When the Connect to dialog opens:
a Enter the User name provided by ADC or by the Network Administrator. The
default is admin.
b Enter the Password provided by ADC or by the Network Administrator. The
default is adc123.
7.4.2.2 Accessing the EMS Through the Remote Craft Port
You can use the Craft port on the SeRF Module to access the FlexWave EMS to view
system configuration and alarms. For example, if there is a problem communicating
with the Remote and you have determined that fiber is not the issue, connecting to
the Craft port helps you obtain beneficial troubleshooting information.
1 Verify that your PC network interface is configured for DHCP.
2 If you have a wireless network interface, disable it. Otherwise an IP conflict may
result if the wireless network resides in the same IP subnet as the Craft port.
3 Open the Prism door.
4 Remove the dust cap from the Craft port located on the SeRF Module.
When you access the EMS through the Remote Craft port, the EMS GUI shows only the
Remote in its Function Explorer Tree. You cannot configure any system components or
clear alarms.
77073-025
RJ-45 Craft port
RJ-45
Connector
5 Use an Ethernet CAT 5 cable with RJ-45 connectors to connect a laptop to the Craft
port.
7 Verify that the laptop is receiving an IP address in the 192.168.0.0/24 subnet (that
is, 192.168.0.100 or 192.168.0.99 and so forth).
8 In the URL field for the Web browser, enter the IP address of the Craft port
(defaults to 192.168.0.1).
9 When the Connect to dialog opens enter viewer in the User name box and in the
Password box.
The user name (viewer) and password (viewer) used to access the EMS through the
Remote Craft port cannot be changed.
8
MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS
8.1 FlexWave EMS User Accounts.............................................................................184
8.2 Viewing User Accounts ......................................................................................185
8.3 Adding a User Account ......................................................................................186
8.4 Changing a User Access Level ............................................................................190
8.5 Changing the Password of Another User ..............................................................194
8.6 Changing Your Own Password ............................................................................196
8.7 Deleting a User Account ....................................................................................198
Content Page
Managing User Accounts
8.1 FLEXWAVE EMS USER ACCOUNTS
The EMS provides security, which can be broadly classified as:
User Authentication, which defines the way a user is identified prior to being
allowed to log on to the EMS. User Authentication ensures that only known users
have access by providing a method of identifying each user through a user ID and
password.
User Authorization, which involves managing the users privileges in the Prism
network management infrastructure. Authorization is based on the concept of
user access system configuration restrictions.
There are three user-access levels that can be assigned by the admin:
adminthe default user account that has unrestricted access to all EMS user
accounts and management capabilities. To protect against unauthorized access to
the Prism network, the user assigned the admin role should follow the process
described in Changing Your Own Password on page 196 to change the password
for the admin user account.
Network Managerhas read and write access to all system functions except user
account management.
Network Userhas read only permissions into the system.
There are also two default user-access levels for the Remote that cannot be deleted
or changed:
Operatorhas Read and Write access to only the Prism Remote functions, all
other operations are Read Only. (This user is not available on URH Remotes.)
Viewerhas Read Only rights for Prism and URH Remotes.
FlexWave EMS prevents a login in which the user enters an invalid User ID or
password.
Viewing User Accounts
8.2 VIEWING USER ACCOUNTS
In the Function Explorer Tree, click on User Account Management, User Account to open
the User Account Management view in the EMS View Frame with a table that lists all
current user accounts.
The User Account Management view has the following elements:
Add New User linkOpens the Add New User dialog (see Adding a User Account
on page 186).
Select radio buttonSelects the user whose account the admin wants to manage.
UserID columnLists users by the User ID entered into the EMS by the admin.
AccessLevel columnidentifies the users access level.
Refresh buttonupdates the User Account Management view
Change Access Level buttonopens the Change Access Level window (see Changing
a User Access Level on page 190).
Change Password buttonopens the Change Password Settings view (Changing the
Password of Another User on page 194)
Delete User buttonallows the admin to delete a user account (see Deleting a User
Account on page 198).
Only a user logged in under the admin account can view all existing user accounts.
8.3 ADDING A USER ACCOUNT
The FlexWave EMS limits the number of users to 50.
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, click on User Account Management, User Account to
open the User Account Management view in the EMS View Frame with a table that
lists all current user accounts.
Only a user logged in under the admin account can add user accounts.
Adding a User Account
2 Click on Add New User to open the Add New User dialog.
3 Verify that the Host name in the User Account Management view heading is correct.
In the graphic above, a user account will be added to Host1_Region1.
4 In the User ID box, type a name by which the user can be identified. No less than 5
or more than 32 characters may be entered. No spaces are allowed. The only
special character allowed is an underscore, which cannot be the first character of
the name. Numerals are allowed, but cannot be the first character of the name.
5 In the New Password box, create a password for the new user. A password must be
between 6 and 12 alphanumeric characters and cannot contain spaces.
6 In the Re-enter Password box, retype the new users password.
7 In the Access Level list, select the security level for the user. The system supports
only one Network Administrator (admin) account, so the new user Access Level can
therefore only be one of the following:
networkManagerassigns the role of Network Manager, which provides read
and write access to all system functions except user account management.
networkUserassigns the role of Network User, which provides read only
permission.
Adding a User Account
8 Click Apply. The User Account created successfully message displays and the Add New
User panel is cleared so you can add another user.
9 Do one of the following:
Follow Steps 5 - 9 to create another user account.
Click Close to close the Add New User dialog.
10 In the User Account Management view, click Refresh to display the newly added
user(s).
8.4 CHANGING A USER ACCESS LEVEL
2 Click the radio button that corresponds to the user whose account is to be edited.
Only a user logged in under the admin account can change a user Access Level.
Changing a User Access Level
3 Click Change Access Level to open the Change Access Level window.
4 Verify that the correct user is listed in the User ID field.
5 Select a new access level. The system has three access levels, but supports only
one admin (Network Administrator) account. The revised user Access Level can
therefore only be one of the following:
networkManagerhas read and write access to all system functions except user
account management.
networkUserhas read only permissions into the system.
6 Click Apply.
The User Account Management window opens showing the new Access Level and
stating that the Access Level has been changed.
7 In the Change Access Level window, click Close.
8 In the User Account Management view, click Refresh.
Changing a User Access Level
The new access level assigned to the user is listed in the AccessLevel column that
corresponds to the UserID.
9 If the user was logged on to the system during this procedure, the user needs to
log off and then log back on again to put the new access level into effect.
8.5 CHANGING THE PASSWORD OF ANOTHER USER
2 Click the radio button that corresponds to the user account for which you want
to change the password.
3 Click Change Password to open the Change Password Settings window.
Only a user logged in under the admin account can change the password for another
user. All users can change their own password (see Changing Your Own Password on
page 196).
Changing the Password of Another User
4 In the Change Password Settings window, do the following:
a In the New Password box, type a new password. A password must be between 6
and 12 alphanumeric or special characters, but cannot contain spaces.
b In the Re-enter Password box, retype the new password.
c Click Change Password.
The password changed successfully message displays:
5 Click Close to close the Change Password Settings window.
8.6 CHANGING YOUR OWN PASSWORD
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, select User Account Management, Change Password to
open the Change Password Settings view in the EMS View Frame.
2 Do the following in the Change Password Settings view:
a In the Old Password box, type your current password.
b In the New Password box, type the new password. A password must be between
6 and 12 alphanumeric or special characters, but cannot contain spaces.
c In the Re-enter Password box, retype the new password.
d Click Change Password.
All users can change their own password. Only a user logged in under the admin account
can change the password for another user (see Changing the Password of Another User
on page 194).
Changing Your Own Password
The password changed successfully message displays:
3 Log out of the EMS and then log back in to set your new password.
8.7 DELETING A USER ACCOUNT
open the User Account Management view in the EMS View Frame.
2 Click the radio button that corresponds to the user account to be deleted.
3 Click Delete User.
4 In the confirmation dialog, verify that you selected the correct user to delete, and
then click OK.
Only a Network Administrator can delete a user account.
The default Network Administrator account with the User ID of admin cannot be deleted.
Deleting a User Account
The user account is removed from the EMS.
9
MANAGING HOST UNITS
9.1 Viewing the Host Summary................................................................................202
9.2 Resetting the Host Unit .....................................................................................203
9.3 Viewing Host SeRF Ethernet Ports.......................................................................205
9.4 Decommissioning a DART in a Host.....................................................................208
9.5 Viewing the Host SeRF Summary........................................................................210
9.6 Viewing Host SeRF Optical Ports.........................................................................212
9.7 Viewing Host DART Alarms ................................................................................214
Content Page
Managing Host Units
9.1 VIEWING THE HOST SUMMARY
This section describes the read-only status indicators in the Host Summary view. For
information on setting Host attributes, see Enter a Host Name, Clock Source, and
Linking Mode on page 135 and Changing to Built-In Network Mode on page 174.
To open the Host Summary view in the EMS View Frame, in the Function Explorer Tree
select System View, and then click on the Host name node.
The read-only status indicators are:
SERFCurrent summary alarm state of Host SeRF card. Red indicates that a major
alarm exists for some component module of the SeRF. Yellow indicates a minor
alarm.
DARTCurrent summary alarm state is indicated by status indicator on same row
of page. Red indicates that a major alarm exists for the DART. Yellow indicates a
minor alarm.
Host Major Contact Alarm OutputDry alarm NO/NC contact (labeled ALARM
OUTPUTS HOST) on the Host. Current state of major alarm contacts is indicated
by Alarm Summary status indicator on same row of page.
Host Minor Contact Alarm OutputDry alarm NO/NC contact (labeled ALARM
OUTPUTS HOST) on the Host. Current state of minor alarm contacts is indicated
by Alarm Summary status indicator on same row of page.
Remote Major Contact Alarm OutputRed indicates Host NO/NC major alarm
contacts are in an alarm position. These connections are typically wired to a local
alarm alert system. This status indicator is red when a major alarm is present on
any Remote connected to the Host.
Remote Minor Contact Alarm OutputRed indicates that Host NO/NC minor alarm
contacts are in an alarm position. These connections are typically wired to a local
alarm alert system. This status indicator is red when a minor alarm is present on
any Remote connected to Host.
Resetting the Host Unit
9.2 RESETTING THE HOST UNIT
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, and then click on the Host name
node to open the Host Summary view in the EMS View Frame.
2 Click Reset Unit.
system settings through the EMS.
Resetting the Host Unit results in a Loss of Service condition for the Host and connected
Remotes until the Host comes back up. Depending on the system configuration, it can
take 5 to 20 minutes for management communication to be restored.
Managing Host Units
3 In the confirmation dialog, click OK.
Once you click OK, the confirmation dialog closes and the Host reboots. It will
take some time for the Host to retrieve data from connected Remotes and to
reconfigure data on the Remotes. During this time, an alert message displays in
the Host Summary view and on any other page where data can be set. Any attempt
to SET will fail. You cannot make configuration changes while this message is
displayed. Wait until the message clears before continuing with configuration
settings.
Viewing Host SeRF Ethernet Ports
9.3 VIEWING HOST SERF ETHERNET PORTS
The Host ENET Configurations view is a summary of throughput and number of errors
on the twelve Ethernet (ENET) ports on the Host SeRF card. These ports consist of
eight ports used for connection to Remotes and four ports used for system
management and maintenance functions.
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Host-x, SERF, ENET (where -x is the
Host name) to open the ENET Configurations view in the EMS View Frame.
Managing Host Units
2 (Optional) To enlarge the view, click Full Screen to open a separate window that
shows only the ENET Configurations table.
3 To update the counters, click Refresh.
The ENET Configurations view lists the Ethernet ports and their corresponding
status.
The row headers in the first column are as follows:
Switch Porton card processor's connection to the switch on the SeRF card
Craft Porton card processor's connection to the PHY port labeled Craft
OptEnetPort1-8Ethernet switch interface to SFP 1-8
Network PortEthernet switch interface to on-card processor
Management Portswitch interface to the PHY port labeled Network
The column headers, from left to right, are as follows:
Rx BytesReceive byte counter. Increments by the byte count of frames
received, including those in bad packets, excluding preamble and SFD but
including FCS bytes
Rx PktsReceive packet counter. Increments for each frame received
packet (including bad packets, all unicast, broadcast, and multicast
packets)
Rx FSC ErrorsReceive FCS error counter. Increments for each frame
received that has an integral 64 to 1518 length and contains a frame check
sequence error
Viewing Host SeRF Ethernet Ports
Rx BroadCast PktsReceive broadcast packet counter. Increments for each
broadcast good frame of lengths 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN),
excluding multicast frames. Does not include range/length errors
Rx MultiCast PktsReceive multicast packet counter. Increments for each
multicast good frame of lengths 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN),
excluding broadcast frames. This count does not include range/length
errors
Rx Fragmented FramesReceive fragments counter. Increments for each
frame received that is less than 64 bytes and contains an invalid FCS. This
includes integral and non-integral lengths
Rx Jabber FramesReceive jabber counter. Increments for frames received
that exceed 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes and contain an invalid
FCS. This includes alignment errors
Tx Byte CounterTransmit byte counter. Increments by the number of bytes
that were put on the wire including fragments of frames that were involved
with collisions. This count does not include preamble/SFD or jam bytes.
This counter does not count if the frame is truncated
Tx Pkt CounterTransmit packet counter. Increments for each transmitted
packet (including bad packets, excessive deferred packets, excessive
collision packets, late collision packets, all unicast, broadcast, and
multicast packets)
Tx BroadCast Pkts.Transmit broadcast packet counter. Increments for
each broadcast frame transmitted (excluding multicast frames)
Tx MultiCast Pkts.Transmit multicast packet counter. Increments for each
multicast valid frame transmitted (excluding broadcast frames)
Managing Host Units
9.4 DECOMMISSIONING A DART IN A HOST
The Decommission button is available only when a DART has already been physically
removed. You use the Decommission button to remove DART configuration settings
and to delete DART alarms from EMS alarm summaries. Entries in the Alarm History
Log, however, are preserved.
This procedure is for decommissioning a DART in a Host. For information on
decommissioning a DART in a Remote, see Decommissioning an RF Module in a Remote
on page 220.
Decommission a DART only if it has been permanently removed from the Remote and
will not be replaced with another DART. When a DART is taken out of service, this
procedure removes information about the DART (such as associated alarms, links, and
inventory) from the EMS database.
You must delete any RF links before you can decommission a Host DART. The FlexWave
system prevents a decommission if RF links are in place.
Decommissioning a DART in a Host
decommissioned. The Configuration and Alarm Details window opens.
3 In the Configuration and Alarm Details window, click the Decommission button.
Managing Host Units
9.5 VIEWING THE HOST SERF SUMMARY
The Host SERF page provides a summary for the SeRF (Serial Radio Frequency) card
located in the Host. The Host SeRF card contains the processor chip where the EMS
software documented in this manual resides. The SeRF controls communication
between the Host and the Remotes, and maintains the system configuration settings.
In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Host-x, SERF (where -x is the Host
name) to open the Prism on SERF of Host-n view in the EMS View Frame.
The Prism on SERF of Host-n view has the following elements:
Optical Portsalarm status indicator for Host optical ports. Red indicates that an
alarm exists for at least one of the eight optical ports on the SeRF card. Yellow
indicates a minor alarm.
SERF Faultstate of the SeRF. Red indicates that either the SeRF clock source is
unacceptable or the SeRF card FPGA is not programmed.
System Fan Faultstate of the Host chassis fan. Red indicates that the Host chassis
fan is spinning too slowly.
Viewing the Host SeRF Summary
Over Temperature FaultRed indicates that the current chassis-internal
temperature of the Host is above its operating limits. Fault threshold is 90 C.
Primary Clock Priority FaultIndicates that there is another Host in a Multi-Host
system that has the same Clock Priority Level (CPL) as this Host. All Hosts that are
in conflict generate this alarm. When all Hosts with this alarm are provisioned
with unique CPLs, the alarm clears. Service is disrupted on all systems when this
alarm is present. The Primary Clock Priority Fault is a Major alarm.
Under Temperature FaultYellow indicates that the current chassis-internal
temperature of the Host is below its operating limits. Fault threshold is -40 C.
Secondary Clock Priority FaultIn a three-Host system, indicates that the Clock
Priority Level for the Host managing the Remote has been changed. All Hosts in
the system generate this alarm. When all Hosts with this alarm are provisioned
with unique CPLs, the alarm clears. Service is not disrupted, but could become
disrupted if the host providing the clock becomes unavailable. The Secondary Clock
Priority Fault is a Minor alarm.
Host Temperature MeasurementGives the current chassis-internal temperature in
degrees Centigrade detected by the Host.
For corrective actions for alarm states, refer to Troubleshooting Alarms on
page 250. For information on setting the Clock Priority Level, see Set the Clock
Priority Level on page 138.
Managing Host Units
9.6 VIEWING HOST SERF OPTICAL PORTS
The Host Optical Ports view shows the current usage and alarm status of the optical
ports on the Host plus the current values of some key operating parameters. The Host
has eight optical ports, but the Host Optical Ports view only shows active ports
(physically connected to a Remote). Each port in the page represents one set of
forward and reverse paths between a Host and Remote. Physically, this may have
been accomplished with two fibers through that port or with a single fiber (if WDM is
used). Each physical port contains an SFP transceiver with two connectors.
The Host Optical Ports view provides a link that can be used to enter or edit the name
for a Host optical port (see Enter a Host Name, Clock Source, and Linking Mode on
page 135).
For corrective actions for alarm states, refer to Troubleshooting Alarms on
page 250.
To access the Host Optical Ports view, in the Function Explorer Tree, select System View,
Host-x, SERF, Optical Ports (where -x is the Host name).
The Optical Ports view for Host-n opens in the EMS View Frame, which only shows the
Receive power level from the Remote unit (REV path). To see the Receive power level
in the FWD path (from the Host to the Remote), you must open the Optical Ports view
for the desired Remote as described in Viewing Remote SeRF Optical Ports on
page 234.
Viewing Host SeRF Optical Ports
The following informational columns are provided in the Optical Ports table.
Optics NumberSystem assigned port number. This is a link to the Port
Configuration Page for this particular port.
Optics Nameuser entered port name or UNKNOWN_SFPName, which indicates that
no name has been entered.
Optics Typeindicates that the laser range, which is LongRange to meet 3Gbps
optical transmission requirements.
Fwd LaunchLaunch power level in dBm of forward path signal. The minimum
FWD launch power is -2 dBm, and the maximum is 3 dBm.
Rev ReceiveReceive power level in dBm of reverse path signal, which incorporates
the launch power of the Remote Unit SFP plus all optical losses (insertion losses,
fiber cable loss, and so forth). The minimum REV launch power is -27 dBm, and
the maximum is -9 dBm.
Wave LengthNumber displayed is wave length transmitted through this port:
Non-duplex and WDM configurations: 1550 nm fwd, 1310 rev
CWDM configurations can be one of eight wavelengths: 1470, 1490, 1510,
1530, 1550, 1570, 1590, 1610.
IpEnable FaultAn attempt to enable IP on a fiber (Host) to a Remote that already
has IP enabled on another fiber (Host) has been made. The alarm is cleared if IP is
disabled on the fiber. It is also cleared if IP becomes enabled. This latter condition
can occur if the fiber that was already carrying IP later has IP disabled, or if the
fiber otherwise becomes disabled. For information on setting Ip Enable, see
Configure the Remote SeRF Optical Ports on page 146.
RxBer FaultYellow indicates that too many errors have been received on the
receiving fiber. Fault threshold is 0.00001. Threshold cannot be changed.
RxNoLight FaultRed indicates that no light is detected on the receiving fiber. Fault
threshold is below -34dBm.
Laser FaultRed indicates that the forward path laser is faulty.
OverDrive FaultRed indicates power of signal received on the fiber is too strong.
Fault threshold is -9dBm. Threshold cannot be changed.
UnderDrive FaultYellow indicates power of signal received on fiber is too weak.
Fault threshold is -27dBm. Threshold cannot be changed.
Remote Namename of the Remote connected to this Optics port.
Managing Host Units
9.7 VIEWING HOST DART ALARMS
A Host may support up to eight DART cards. Each DART card provides one RF band
for up to eight Remotes. The DART card converts between serial (optical) and RF data
in both forward and reverse directions. The Prism Host DARTs Alarm Summary view lists
all DART cards currently installed in the Host and provides an alarm summary status
indicator for each card. This page also provides a link, for each DART card, to a more
detailed page that can be used to configure the DART card and obtain alarm details
(for more information, see Configure the Host DARTs on page 140).
the Host name) to open the Host DARTs Alarm Summary view in the EMS View
Frame.
2 In the Information column, click on the Band-Config link for the DART that you want
to monitor. The Configuration and Alarm Details of DART n on Host-x window opens
(where DART n corresponds to the DART whose Band-Config link you selected).
2
Viewing Host DART Alarms
The Configuration and Alarm Details of DART n on Host-x window shows the following
Host DART alarms:
DART FaultSummary alarm state of the DART card. Red indicates a problem
with passing RF.
DART Over Drive FaultRed indicates that the RF signal received from the BTS
is too strong. Fault threshold is +20dBm.
DART Hardware Mismatch FaultRed indicates that the DART type doesn't match
the assigned Pass Band. Examples: After assigning the Pass Band, if the DART
is changed with another DART type, then the DART Hardware Mismatch Fault
occurs. Or, if you swap DART types (such as, from GSM1800 to UMTS), the
DART Hardware Mismatch Fault is raised as the stored database has one DART
type configured, and the new hardware doesn't match it.
DART UnderDrive FaultYellow indicates that the power of the signal received
on the RF input to the DART is 20 dB below the optimal input level. For
example:
3 Click Refresh to update the alarm summary. For corrective actions for alarm states,
refer to Troubleshooting Alarms on page 250.
Host Forward DART
Gain
Full- Scale Input
UnderDrive
Threshold
0 dB - 25 dBm - 45 dBm
10 dB - 15 dBm - 35 dBm
20 dB - 5 dBm - 25 dBm
30 dB +5 dBm - 15 dBm
Managing Host Units
10
MANAGING REMOTE UNITS
10.1 Viewing Remote SeRF Ethernet Ports.................................................................218
10.2 Decommissioning an RF Module in a Remote ......................................................220
10.3 Restarting an LPA...........................................................................................222
10.3.1 Identify the LPA Fault ..............................................................................222
10.3.2 Reset the LPA.........................................................................................224
10.4 Monitoring a Remote Unit ................................................................................226
10.5 Decommissioning a Remote Unit.......................................................................230
10.6 Resetting a Remote Unit ..................................................................................232
10.7 Viewing Remote SeRF Alarms...........................................................................234
10.8 Viewing Remote SeRF Optical Ports...................................................................234
10.9 Viewing an Alarm Summary of the Remote RF Groups .........................................236
10.10 Viewing RF Band Alarm Details .......................................................................238
10.11 Viewing Remote GPS Alarms and Location Parameters .......................................241
Content Page
Managing Remote Units
10.1 VIEWING REMOTE SERF ETHERNET PORTS
The Remote SERF ENET page is a summary of throughput and number of errors on
the twelve Ethernet (ENET) ports on the Remote SeRF card. These ports, located on
the front side of the SeRF card, consist of eight ports used for connection to Remotes
and four ports used for system management and maintenance functions.
To open the ENET Configurations view in the EMS View Frame, in the Function Explorer
Tree select System View, Remotes, SERF, ENET.
The ENET Configurations view lists the Ethernet ports and their corresponding status.
Switch Porton card processor's connection to the switch on the SeRF card
Craft Porton card processor's connection to the PHY port labeled Craft
OptEnetPort1-8Ethernet switch interface to SFP 1-8
Network PortEthernet switch interface to on-card processor
Management Portswitch interface to the PHY port labeled Network
Rx BytesReceive byte counter. Increments by the byte count of frames received,
including those in bad packets, excluding preamble and SFD but including FCS
bytes
Rx PktsReceive packet counter. Increments for each frame received packet
(including bad packets, all unicast, broadcast, and multicast packets)
Rx FSC ErrorsReceive FCS error counter. Increments for each frame received that
has an integral 64 to 1518 length and contains a frame check sequence error
Viewing Remote SeRF Ethernet Ports
Rx BroadCast PktsReceive broadcast packet counter. Increments for each
broadcast good frame of lengths 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN),
excluding multicast frames. Does not include range/length errors
Rx MultiCast PktsReceive multicast packet counter. Increments for each multicast
good frame of lengths 64 to 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN), excluding
broadcast frames. This count does not include range/length errors
Rx Fragmented FramesReceive fragments counter. Increments for each frame
received that is less than 64 bytes and contains an invalid FCS. This includes
integral and non-integral lengths
Rx Jabber FramesReceive jabber counter. Increments for frames received that
exceed 1518 (non VLAN) or 1522 (VLAN) bytes and contain an invalid FCS. This
includes alignment errors
Tx Byte CounterTransmit byte counter. Increments by the number of bytes that
were put on the wire including fragments of frames that were involved with
collisions. This count does not include preamble/SFD or jam bytes. This counter
does not count if the frame is truncated
Tx Pkt CounterTransmit packet counter. Increments for each transmitted packet
(including bad packets, excessive deferred packets, excessive collision packets,
late collision packets, all unicast, broadcast, and multicast packets)
Tx BroadCast Pkts.Transmit broadcast packet counter. Increments for each
broadcast frame transmitted (excluding multicast frames)
Tx MultiCast Pkts.Transmit multicast packet counter. Increments for each
multicast valid frame transmitted (excluding broadcast frames)
10.2 DECOMMISSIONING AN RF MODULE IN A REMOTE
The Decommission button is available only when a RF Module and hence the DART(s)
have already been physically removed. You use the Decommission button when an RF
Module and its DART(s) have taken out of service. This procedure removes all
information about this RF Module (such as associated alarms, links, and inventory)
from the EMS database. Entries in the Alarm History Log, however, are preserved.
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, SERF, Optical
Ports (where Remote# indicates the Remote number that corresponds to a Host SFP
port number and n is the Remote name).
The Alarm Summary of RF Groups view opens in the EMS View Frame. For a
description of the RF Groups, see RF Groups in the Remote and the EMS GUI on
page 148.
whose DART needs to be decommissioned.
Decommission a RF Module only if it has been permanently removed from the Remote
and will not be replaced with another DART.
This procedure is for decommissioning a Remotes RF Modules, which contain the
Remote DARTS. For information on decommissioning a DART in a Host, see
Decommissioning a DART in a Host on page 208.
Decommissioning an RF Module in a Remote
3 In the Configuration Details window, click the Decommission button.
10.3 RESTARTING AN LPA
You use the LPA Reset button to bring an LPA back into service (restart) that stopped
because of an LPA alarm.
This section comprises a 6-step process that is broken into 2 sections that first
identifies the fault and then resets the LPA.
10.3.1 Identify the LPA Fault
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, RF Groups
(where Remote# indicates the Remote number that corresponds to a Host SFP port
number and n is the Remote name).
2 In the rectangle for the RF group selected, click on the band link for the band
whose LPA needs to be reset. The Alarm Details of DART-x of Group x on Remote#-x
window opens (where x is the DART, Group or Remote name).
Restarting an LPA
An LPA Reset is necessary when any of the alarms listed below have occurred.
LPA Disable FaultRed indicates that the Linear Power Amplifier is disabled
because it encountered a problem. Check for a corresponding LPA fault listed in
this section (such as LPA Loop Fault, LPA Over Power Fault, and so forth), then correct
the LPA fault. If LPA Reset does not clear this alarm, the corresponding RF Module
may need to be replaced. Contact ADC Technical Assistance for further help (see
Contacting ADC on page 319).
LPA VSWR FaultRed indicates an internal VSWR fault state of the LPA. Check the
Remotes antenna connection. If the connection is good and a subsequent LPA
reset does not clear the alarm, inspect the blue cable going from the
corresponding Remote Antenna port to the Duplexerverify that the connection
is tight. If this doesn't clear the fault, the Duplexer may need to be replaced. Notify
ADC Technical Support (see Contacting ADC on page 319).
LPA DC FaultRed indicates that the voltage level inside the LPA is outside its
acceptable range. If the LPA Reset does not clear this alarm, contact ADC
Technical Assistance for further help as the RF Module that contains the LPA or
the Power supply within the SeRF Module may need to be replaced (see
Contacting ADC on page 319).
LPA Loop FaultRed indicates that the LPA is not sure of the feedback loop, so it
has placed itself into a safe state. You can attempt to recover the LPA by reducing
forward gain by 10dB on both DART cards, resetting the LPA, then restoring GAIN.
If the reset does not work, contact ADC Technical Support (see Contacting ADC
on page 319).
LPA Over Power FaultRed indicates that the power level inside the LPA is high
enough to damage the LPA. Reduce the Remote Forward Gain (see Link the Host
and Remote DARTs. on page 147), then reset the LPA.
LPA Low Power FaultRed indicates that the internal gain of the LPA does not meet
specifications. In addition to an LPA Reset, try putting the LPA into standby and
then back to enable to see if this clears this fault. If neither troubleshooting step
clears this alarm, the corresponding RF Module may need to be replaced. contact
ADC Technical Assistance for further help (see Contacting ADC on page 319).
LPA Missing FaultRed indicates that the LPA is missing. This fault cannot be cleared
with an LPA Reset.
10.3.2 Reset the LPA
SFP port number and n is the Remote name).
whose LPA needs to be reset.
5 In the Configuration Details window, click the LPA Reset button.
Once an LPA Reset is started, Loss of Service occurs. It take approximately 10 to 20
seconds before the LPA signal recovers. The GUI RF power reading will take longer
depending on the number of Remotes equippedfor a fully loaded Prism system with 8
Remotes the power reading could take several minutes to update.
Restarting an LPA
6 In the LPA Reset caution dialog, click OK.
10.4 MONITORING A REMOTE UNIT
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, select System View, Remotes to open the top level
Remote Alarm Summary view in the EMS View Frame.
2 If the Alarm Summary status indicator for any Remote is red or yellow, indicating
that an alarm exists for that Remote, in the Function Explorer Tree, select the node
that corresponds to that Remote. In the preceding example, you would click on
the remote node labeled Rmt1_Hst1_Reg1.
This opens the Prism Remote Unit Remote-n summary that corresponds to the
selected Remote (Remote-n).
Monitoring a Remote Unit
3 If the SERF or RF Groups Alarm Summary status indicator is red or yellow, you must
go another level lower in the Function Explorer Tree for this same Remote to select
the page for the SeRF or RF Groups. For more information on these displays, see
Viewing Remote SeRF Alarms on page 234 or Viewing Remote SeRF Optical
Ports on page 234.
The GPS alarm is not supported at present; this status indicator will be white.
4 If any status indicator in the Major Alarms or Minor Alarms table is red or yellow,
refer to the following list:
Remote CapacityNumber of slots for RF Modules in the remote. Each RF
Module comprises up to two Classic DARTS or Single SuperDARTs or one Dual
SuperDART.
Remote Temperature fieldCurrently detected internal temperature of the
Remote (measured near the SeRF board).
Host Lost Fault status indicatorRed indicates Remote has lost contact with
Host.
Remote Lost Fault status indicatorRed indicates that the Host is unable to
communicate with the Remote.
AC Power Supply Fault status indicatorRed indicates Remote power supply has
failed.
Over Temperature Fault status indicatorRed indicates internal temperature in
Remote is over its functional operating limit. Fault threshold is 84C.
Fan Under Speed FaultRed indicates that the speed of the Remote fan is not
high enough for the internal functional temperature of the Remote.
Under Temperature Fault status indicatorYellow indicates that the internal
temperature within the Remote is under the operating limit. Fault threshold is
-40C.
Fan Over Speed FaultYellow indicates that the Remote fan is not necessary for
the current internal temperature of the Remote, but the fan is spinning (Minor
alarm).
Open Door FaultYellow status indicator for this Minor alarm, which indicates
that the door to the Remote is open.
Apply buttonWhen clicked, causes Remote Name entry to be applied
Refresh buttonWhen clicked, causes page to be reloaded from Host
DART ID 8
RF Slot 4 DART ID 7
DART ID 6
RF Slot 3 DART ID 5
DART ID 4
RF Slot 2 DART ID 3
DART ID 2
RF Slot 1 DART ID 1
SERF Board
Monitoring a Remote Unit
Reset Unit buttonWhen clicked, causes the Remote to reboot. This causes a
Loss of Service until Remote has returned to normal operation. Typical down
time is two to four minutes. See Resetting a Remote Unit on page 232.
Decommission Unit buttonWhen clicked, deletes any configuration settings
for that Remote and removes all corresponding alarms from the EMS alarm
summaries (see Decommissioning a Remote Unit on page 230).
The use of the Reset Unit button causes Loss of Service and should not be used unless
other troubleshooting processes have been followed and did not fix the issue being
experienced at the Remote.
10.5 DECOMMISSIONING A REMOTE UNIT
The Decommission button is available only when a Remote has already been physically
removed from the system. You use the Decommission button to delete alarms related
to the removed Remote from the EMS alarm summaries.
1 If the system is configured for manual linking mode, remove any RF links to the
DART.
2 In the Function Explorer Tree, select the node that corresponds to the Remote that
has been physically removed from the Prism system.
This opens the Prism Remote Unit Remote-n summary that corresponds to the
selected Remote (Remote-n). There should be a statement that communication
with the Remote has been lost.
Decommission a Remote only if it has been permanently removed from the Remote and
will not be replaced with another Remote. This procedure removes all information about
this Remote (such as associated alarms, links, and inventory) from the EMS database.
Decommissioning a Remote Unit
3 Click Decommission Unit.
10.6 RESETTING A REMOTE UNIT
If communication and/or reverse-path fiber is lost to the Remote, a Remote Reset can
be attempted.
1 In the Function Explorer Tree, select the node that corresponds to the Remote that
you want to reset. This opens the Prism Remote Unit Remote-n summary that
corresponds to the selected Remote (Remote-n).
2 Click the Reset Unit button.
Resetting the Remote causes Loss of Service and should not be used unless other
troubleshooting processes have been followed and did not fix the issue being
experienced at the Remote.
Resetting a Remote Unit
The Remote reboots (resets), which causes a Loss of Service until the Remote has
returned to normal operation. Typical down time is two to four minutes.
10.7 VIEWING REMOTE SERF ALARMS
To open the Prism on SERF of Remote-n view in the EMS View Frame, in the Function
Explorer Tree select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, SERF (where Remote# indicates
the Remote number that corresponds to a Host SFP port number and n is the Remote
name).
The Prism on SERF of Remote-n view provides an alarm summary for the SeRF card on
the identified Remote.
Optical Ports status indicatorSummary alarm status indicator for Remote optical
ports. Red indicates no light (such as the RxNolight Fault) or a laser fault.
SERF Fault status indicatorSummary alarm status indicator for Remote SeRF
card. Red indicates that an alarm exists for the Remote SeRF card.
10.8 VIEWING REMOTE SERF OPTICAL PORTS
The Optical Ports On Remote-n view shows the current usage and alarm status of the
optical ports on the Remote, plus current values of operating parameters. The Optical
Ports On Remote-n view only shows the ports that are in current use (that is, they have
a fiber and connector plugged into them with the other end of the fiber being
connected to Remote).
To open the Optical Ports On Remote-n view in the EMS View Frame, in the Function
Explorer Tree select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, SERF, Optical Ports (where
Remote# indicates the Remote number that corresponds to a Host SFP port number
and n is the Remote name).
Viewing Remote SeRF Optical Ports
The Optical Ports On Remote-n view provides an alarm summary for the SeRF card on
the identified Remote.
Optics NumberSystem-assigned port number and link to the Port Configuration
Page for this particular port
Optics NameUser-entered port name or UNKNOWN_SFPName indicating no name
has been entered
Ip EnableDisabled for Remotes. This parameter indicates if the link is carrying IP
traffic. It can only be set on the Host as described in Configure the Remote SeRF
Optical Ports on page 146.
Optics TypeLaser range, which is LongRange to meet 3Gbps optical transmission
requirements.
Fwd LaunchLaunch power in dB of REV path signal, from the Remote to the Host.
Rev ReceiveLaunch power in dB of receive level of the FWD path, from the Host
to the Remote. The minimum REV launch power is -27 dBm, and the maximum is
-9 dBm.
Wave LengthNumber displayed is wave length transmitted through this port
RxBer FaultYellow indicates that there ware too many errors on the receiving
fiber. Fault threshold is 0.00001.
RxNoLight FaultRed indicates that no light is detected on the receiving fiber
Laser FaultRed indicates reverse path laser is not sending light
OverDrive FaultRed indicates forward path optical signal is too strong. Fault
threshold is -9dBm.
UnderDrive FaultYellow indicates forward path optical signal is too weak. The
underdrive is from -28dBm to -33dBm. Fault threshold is -27dBm.
Host NameName of the Host at the other end of the fiber.
10.9 VIEWING AN ALARM SUMMARY OF THE REMOTE RF
GROUPS
The Alarm Summary of RF Groups of Remote-n view provides an alarm summary for the
four RF groups on a particular Remote (Remote-n).
To open the Alarm Summary of RF Groups of Remote-n view in the EMS View Frame, in
the Function Explorer Tree select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, RF Groups (where
Remote# indicates the Remote number that corresponds to a Host SFP port number
and n is the Remote name).
To understand how the EMS maps the RF Groups in the Remote to their
representation in the GUI, see RF Groups in the Remote and the EMS GUI on
page 148. The RF Group alarm indicators are listed below.
DARTSummary alarm state of the DART card upconverter, downconverter and
the DART FPGA. Yellow indicates that a Minor alarm is the highest-level alarm and
Red indicates that a Major alarm exists for the DART.
LPASummary alarm state of Linear Power Amplifier (LPA), where both LPA
indicators refer to the same LPA. Yellow indicates that a Minor alarm is the
highest-level alarm and Red indicates that a Major alarm exists for the LPA.
Viewing an Alarm Summary of the Remote RF Groups
LNASummary alarm state of the Low Noise Amplifier (LNA). Red indicates that
an active alarm exists for the LNA.
Power DetRed indicates that the LPA has been shut down. On initial
configuration, the Power Det indicator will be red until the link is created.
10.10 VIEWING RF BAND ALARM DETAILS
The Alarm Summary of RF Groups of Remote-n view shows band-specific alarm
indicators and their current values.
1 To open the Alarm Summary of RF Groups of Remote-n view in the EMS View Frame,
in the Function Explorer Tree select System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, RF Groups
(where Remote# indicates the Remote number that corresponds to a Host SFP port
number and n is the Remote name).
Viewing RF Band Alarm Details
2 Click on a DART band in the RF Groups view (upper link) to open the Alarm Details
of DART-n of Group n on Remote-n window.
The Alarm Details of DART-n of Group n on Remote-n window has the the following
components. For corrective actions for alarm states, refer to Troubleshooting
Alarms on page 250.
DART Major Alarms
DART FaultSummary alarm state of the DART card upconverter
downconverter and the DART FPGA. Red indicates that either the clock
source for the DART card is outside the acceptable range or the DART FPGA
is not programmed.
DART DC Supply FaultRed indicates DART card DC supply is faulted.
DART Hardware Mismatch FaultRed indicates an invalid passband
configuration for the DART.
DART Over Temperature FaultRed indicates DART card internal
temperature is too high. Fault threshold is 84C.
DART Remote Ranging FaultRed indicates that the Host is unable to
implement the signal delay entered in the RF Band Configuration Page
(described in Link the Host and Remote DARTs. on page 147).
Power Detector Major Alarms
System VSWR FaultRed indicates a VSWR fault at the interface to the
antenna (greater than 3:1).
RF Power FaultRed indicates that the RF power measured at the antenna
output is too low. The threshold for this fault is 0 dBm.
LNA Major Alarms
LNA Power FaultRed indicates that the Low Noise Amplifier has an internal
error.
LPA Major Alarms
LPA Disable FaultRed indicates that the Linear Power Amplifier is disabled
because it encountered a problem.
LPA VSWR FaultRed indicates that an internal VSWR fault state of the LPA.
Fault threshold is 2.
LPA DC FaultRed indicates that the voltage level inside the LPA is outside
its acceptable range.
LPA Loop FaultRed indicates that the feedback loop inside the LPA is not
working.
LPA Over Power FaultRed indicates that the power level inside the LPA is
high enough to damage the LPA.
LPA Low Power FaultRed indicates that the internal gain of LPA does does
not meet specification.
LPA Missing FaultRed indicates that the LPA is missing.
DART Minor Alarms
DART Low Temperature FaultYellow indicates DART temperature is too low.
Fault threshold is -40C.
LPA Minor Alarms
LPA High Temperature FaultYellow indicates that the LPA internal
temperature is too high.
Viewing Remote GPS Alarms and Location Parameters
10.11 VIEWING REMOTE GPS ALARMS AND LOCATION
PARAMETERS
The Remote GPS (Global Positioning System) page shows the alarm status and location
parameters for the Remote GPS function.
To open the GPS summary in the EMS View Frame, in the Function Explorer Tree select
System View, Remotes, Remote#-x, GPS (where Remote# indicates the Remote number
that corresponds to a Host SFP port number and n is the Remote name).
GPS is not supported in the software version documented in this manual so the Remote
GPS page components are not described.
11
MANAGING ALARMS
11.1 Viewing Active Alarms .....................................................................................244
11.2 Viewing an Alarm History Log...........................................................................245
11.3 Masking an Alarm Type ...................................................................................246
11.4 Unmasking an Alarm Type ...............................................................................248
11.5 Troubleshooting Alarms...................................................................................250
Some EMS parameter values are associated with alarms. When a parameter enters an
alarm state, an alarm status indicator is activated where the color of the indicates the
alarm severity, where:
Red indicates a major alarm
Yellow indicates a minor alarm
Green indicates a normal (okay) state
Grey indicates that the alarm has been masked
White indicates that an associated device is unplugged or missing.
Content Page
Managing Alarms
11.1 VIEWING ACTIVE ALARMS
Viewing the Active Alarm List window is a means to determine alarm type, Host unit
name, Remote name, time stamp, and other information for active alarms.
1 To access the EMS Menu bar, in the Function Explorer Tree, click on System View to
display a system view.
2 To open the Active Alarm List window, in the EMS Menu bar select Active Alarm List.
The Active Alarm List table provides the following information:
Alarm TypeDescriptive name of alarm. For more information, refer to
Troubleshooting Alarms on page 250.
Host NoAlways 1
Host NameUser-defined Host name or system default
Remote NoSystem assigned number of Remote from which alarm came
Remote NameUser-defined Remote name or system default
Module TypeType of unit that is experiencing the alarm (SeRF, DART, LPA, LNA,
Power Detector, SFP)
Module NumberUnit number of module experiencing the alarm condition
SeverityMajor or Minor
Time StampDate and time when the alarm occurred (YYYY:MM:DD:HH:MM:SS)
Viewing an Alarm History Log
11.2 VIEWING AN ALARM HISTORY LOG
2 To open the Active Alarm List window, in the EMS Menu bar select Active Alarm List.
3 To open the Alarm Log History window, in the Active Alarm List window click the
History Log link.
The Alarm Log History window components are the same as for the Active Alarm List
window (see Viewing Active Alarms on page 244), except the Alarm Log History
window includes the severity of Clear if the alarm condition has been cleared.
Managing Alarms
11.3 MASKING AN ALARM TYPE
Masking an alarm type causes the EMS to stop reporting alarms of that type until the
alarm is unmasked. By default all alarms are unmasked. When an alarm type is
masked (mask status enabled), the following is true:
The corresponding status indicator shows in gray.
The alarm state is not calculated into the higher level alarm summary
The corresponding trap is not sent to SNMP managers.
To mask an alarm:
2 In the EMS Menu bar, select Alarm Management.
The Alarm Management Table window opens.
Masking an Alarm Type
3 Click the list in the Mask Status column for the alarm for which you want to enable
a mask, select enable, and then click Apply.
In the following graphic, a mask has been enabled for the SeRF Secondary Clock
Priority Fault.
Managing Alarms
11.4 UNMASKING AN ALARM TYPE
Unmasking an alarm type causes the EMS to report alarms of that type until the alarm
is masked. By default all alarms are unmasked.
2 In the EMS Menu bar, select Alarm Management.
The Alarm Management Table window opens.
Unmasking an Alarm Type
3 Click the list in the Mask Status column for the alarm for which you want to
disable a mask, select disable, and then click Apply.
In the following graphic, masking has been disabled for the SeRF Secondary Clock
Priority Fault.
Managing Alarms
11.5 TROUBLESHOOTING ALARMS
This section lists alarms that can be viewed in EMS alarm summaries.
Table 11-1. EMS Alarm Descriptions and Corrective Actions
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
HostDARTDCSupplyFault Major The voltage supplied
to the DART board is
too low. (Host DC
Power board accepts
21- 60 Vdc and draws
up to 427.28 Watts
per Host.)
Check whether the
Vdc supply is in the
range of 21- 60 Vdc. If
persistent (may be
transient on startup),
contact ADC.
HostDARTDwnCon1SynLockFault Major Lock state of the first
down converter
synthesizer. Causes
RF mute
When a DART is being
turned up or after a
power reset, the DART
synthesizers may go
in and out of lock,
which may cause this
fault. Unless this fault
persists, these
transient faults can be
ignored. If persistent,
consult ADC, replace
DART
HostDARTDwnCon2SynLockFault Major Lock state of the
second
downconverter
synthesizer. Causes
RF mute
When a DART is being
turned up or after a
power reset, the DART
synthesizers may go
in and out of lock,
which may cause this
fault. Unless this fault
persists, these
transient faults can be
ignored. If persistent,
DART
HostDARTFault Major Summary status of
DART upconverter
and/ or
downconverter and
DART FPGA status.
The clock source for
the DART is outside
an acceptable range
or the DART FPGA is
not programmed.
may also occur with
the
DARTDCSupplyFault.
Inspect Active Alarm
List for upconverter
and/ or
downconverter
alarms. If these
alarms are found and
persist, consult ADC,
replace DART. If no
upconverter/ downco
nverter alarms are
found, unplug DART
from Host, then
replug DART in Host
to reload the FPGA. If
persistent, consult
ADC, replace DART.
Troubleshooting Alarms
HostDARTHardwareMismatchFault Major Indicates a hardware
mismatch for the
DART boards between
linked Host and
Remote
Check if a linked
DART of one type was
unplugged and not
decommissioned then
replaced with a DART
of another type. Make
sure linked Host and
Remote DARTs are of
same type
HostDARTOverDriveFault Major the RF signal received
from BTS is greater
than +5dBm. The
allowed range is - 25
dBm to +5 dBm.
Lower the gain on the
Host DART. If
persistent when gain
is zero, lower power
of BTS RF signal.
Maximum power at
zero gain is +19dBm.
HostDARTUnderDriveFault Minor When the Host input
level is 20 dB less
than the expected
Host DART Input. For
example, for 30 dB of
Host DART gain (- 25
dBm expected input),
the threshold is - 45
dBm. For 0 dB of Host
DART gain (+5 dBm
expected input), the
threshold is - 15 dBm.
Increase the gain of
the Host DART. If
persistent when gain
is at maximum,
increase power of BTS
RF signal.
HostDARTUpConSynLockFault Major Lock state of the
upconvertor
synthesizer
If persistent, consult
ADC, replace DART
HostModuleMissingFault Major One of the pluggable
modules is missing on
the Host
Either insert a
replacement unit or
decommission the
unit
HostOverTempFault Major The temperature of
the Host is Over its
upper limit of 84C
Check Host fan and
ambient conditions
HostSERFFault Major Summary fault for
SeRF combining SeRF
synthesizer and SeRF
FPGA status. Either
the clock source is not
acceptable or the
SeRF board FPGA is
not programmed.
Check for related
SeRF alarms in Active
Alarm List and
respond to those
alarms if found. If no
SeRF alarms exists,
FPGA is faulty; consult
ADC, replace SeRF. If
SeRF is replaced, use
the same Compact
Flash to retain system
configuration.
Table 11-1. EMS Alarm Descriptions and Corrective Actions (Cont.)
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
Managing Alarms
HostSERFOptOverDriveFault Major The power of the
signal received from
the Remote exceeds
the maximum level of
- 9dBm
Externally attenuate
Remote return path
signal or replace
Remote SFP with one
of less strength
HostSerfOptRxBerFault Minor Too many errors on
the receiving fiber
Check fiber for kink or
sharp bend. Check for
too much gain. Make
sure the fiber is clean.
HostSERFOptRxNoLightFault Major No light detected
from the receiving
fiber
Check for broken or
disconnected fiber.
Check for out of
service Remote
HostSERFOptUnderDriveFault Minor The power of the
signal received on the
fiber is below the
minimum power level
of - 27dBm
Check fiber for too
much attenuation,
dirty connectors.
Check SFP type being
used (too weak for
range)
HostSERFRmtLostFault Major Host is not receiving
messages from
connected Remote or
there is an IP conflict
causing loss of
communication
Check for optics
disconnect. Check for
Remote out of power
or out of service
Check for IP conflict
HostSERFSynthAlarmFault Major The configured clock
source is not
providing an
acceptable signal
If clock source is
onboard and persists,
system card. If clock
source is external,
check clock source,
connection
HostSysCardFanFault Major The Host fan is
spinning too slowly
Check fan for
mechanical problem.
If not fixable, consult
ADC, replace fan
HostUnderTempFault Minor The temperature of
the Host is under its
lower operating limit
(- 40 degrees
Fahrenheit )
Check ambient
conditions
RmtAcPowerSupplyFault,
RmtACPowerSupplyMon1Fault
Major A power supply is in a
failed state
ADC, may have to
replace one or more
power supply located
in the SeRF Module
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
RmtDARTDCSupplyFault Major The onboard DC
voltages are out of
their valid ranges
If persistent (may be
transient on startup),
check If the DC power
switch to the DART is
in the OFF position. If
DC power is ON, reset
set the RF Module. If
the alarm persists,
consult ADC, as you
may have to replace
RF Module
RmtDARTDwnCon1SynLockFault Major Lock state of the first
downconverter
synthesizer
ADC, replace RF
Module
RmtDARTDwnCon2SynLockFault Major Lock state of the
second
downconverter
synthesizer
ADC, replace RF
Module
RmtDARTFault Major Summary fault status
of DART upconvertor/
downconverter and
DART FPGA status
ADC, replace RF
Module
RmtDARTHardwareMismatchFault Major Indicates a hardware
mismatch for the
DART cards between
linked Host and
Remote
Check if a linked
DART of one type was
unplugged and not
decommissioned then
replaced with a DART
of another type. Make
sure linked Host and
Remote DARTs are of
same type
RmtDARTOverTempFault Major Indicates that
detected temperature
is above the
maximum ambient
temperature of 50C.
Check air flow around
Remote. If persists,
consult ADC.
RmtDARTUnderTempFault Minor Indicates that
detected temperature
is below the lower
acceptable limit (- 40
degrees Farenheit)
Check ambient
conditions
RmtDARTUpConSynLockFault Major Lock state of the
upconverter
synthesizer
ADC, replace RF
Module
RmtLNAPowerFault Major The low noise
amplifier has an
internal error
ADC, replace RF
Module
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
Managing Alarms
RmtLPADcFault Major The LPA voltage level
is outside its
acceptable range.
Causes RF mute
Reset LPA and
recheck. If alarm
keeps coming back,
RF Module
RmtLPADetectFault Major Presence fault state of
the LPA (the LPA
cannot be detected)
ADC, replace RF
Module
RmtLPADisableFault Major Disable state of the
LPA. The LPA is
disabled because it
encountered a
problem
See Identify the LPA
Fault on page 222. If
fault cannot be
corrected, replace the
RF Module
RmtLPAHighTempFault Minor LPA is overheated Check ambient
temperature. Check
remote temperature.
Reset LPA. If
persistent, consult
ADC, replace RF
Module
RmtLPALoopFault Major The feedback loop
inside the LPA is not
working. Causes RF
mute
Lower DART(s) remote
gain by 10dB, reset
the LPA, then return
gain to values
previously
configured. If fault
persists, replace RF
Module.
RmtLPALowPowerFault Major Internal low power
fault state of linear
power amplifier (the
gain of one or more
internal amplifiers
does not meet
specification). Causes
RF mute
Reset LPA. If error
persists, consult ADC,
replace RF Module
RmtLPAOverPowerFault Internal over power
fault state of linear
power amplifier
(power level is high
enough to damage
LPA)
Reduce FWD gain,
reset the LPA, and
then monitor power
levels. Adjust gain to
acceptable values.
Reset LPA. If error
replace RF Module
RmtLPAVswrFault Major Internal VSWR fault
state of linear power
amplifier (greater
than 3:1). Causes RF
mute
Reset LPA. If error
replace RF Module
RmtMajorExtAlarmInputFault Major External major alarm
contact input
Not used
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
RmtMinorExtAlarmInputFault ALARM-
TYPE
(Minor,
OK)
External minor alarm
contact input
Not used
RmtModuleMissingFault Major One of the pluggable
modules is missing on
the Remote
Replace or
decommission the
missing module
RmtNoRFPowerFault Major The RF power
measured at the
antenna output is too
low. The threshold for
this fault is 0 dBm.
Verify that there is an
active Host DART
Under Drive Fault,
which indicates a loss
of BTS input. If this
fault is active, address
this problem and the
RmtNoRFPowerFault
should clear.
If there is not an
active Host DART
Under Drive Fault, the
problem may be the
result of another LPA
fault such as VSWR or
Over Power Faults. If
there are no other
faults, then reset the
Remote RF Module. If
power is still not,
present then replace
the module.
RmtOverTempFault Major High temperature
reading from RSI card
in Remote
Check ambient
temperature. Check
remote temperature.
If not an actual over
temperature fault,
shut down Remote,
consult ADC
RmtRangingFault Major The configured delay
is outside the range of
what can be supplied.
Enter a delay value
within the permissible
range see Link a
Remote DART to a
Host DART on
page 150
RmtSERFFault Major Summary fault for
SeRF combining SeRF
synthesizer and SeRF
FPGA status
Check for related
SeRF alarms in active
alarms list and
respond to those
alarms if found. If no
SeRF alarm exists,
FPGA is faulty; consult
ADC, replace SeRF
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
Managing Alarms
RmtSERFHstLostFault Major Remote not receiving
any messages from
connected Host
There are two
possible actions:
Check for optics
disconnect. Check
the optical link and
determine the
source of lost
communications. If
an optical meter on
the output of the
SFP determines that
no power is being
transmitted, or
meter measuring
receive levels at the
SFP determines the
receiver is broken,
replace SFP with the
appropriate type
for the range of
signal supported.
There may be an IP
conflict. For
example, if the
Host is configured
in External Network
mode but there's
not a DHCP server
running on the
network, the
Remote will not
receive an IP
address, there
therefore will not
be communication
with the Host,
which would
activate this alarm.
RmtSERFOptLaserFault Major SFP reports that laser
of forward path is
faulty
Replace SFP with the
appropriate type for
range of signal
supported
RmtSERFOptOverDriveFault Major The power of the
signal received at the
Remote is too strong
Externally attenuate
Host forward path
signal or replace Host
SFP with one of less
strength
RmtSERFOptRxBERFault Minor Too many errors on
the receiving fiber
Check fiber for kink or
sharp bend. Check for
too much gain. Make
sure the fiber is clean.
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
RmtSERFOptRxNoLightFault Major No light detected
from the receiving
fiber
Check for broken or
disconnected fiber.
Check for out of
service Host
RmtSERFOptUnderDriveFault Minor The power of the
signal received on the
fiber is too weak
Check fiber for too
much gain, dirty
connectors. Check
SFP type being used
(too weak for range)
RmtSERFSynthAlarmFault Major Onboard synthesizer
fault
Check clock signal
coming from Host.
Host is not generating
a proper signal.
Possibly Host clock
source is bad or Host
has bad FPGA
RmtSystemVswrFault Major LPA VSWR Fault Perform cable sweeps
on external antenna
cable system. Put a
load on the Remote by
disconnecting the
external antenna
cable to determine if
the source of the
VSWR condition is
internal or external. If
it's internal, replace
the RF Module. If it's
external,
troubleshoot and
determine source of
high VSWR reading.
RmtUnderTempFault Minor Temperature is below
lower acceptable limit
(- 40 degrees
Farenheit)
Check ambient
conditions
fwuHstSERFOptIpEnableFault Major An attempt to enable
IP on a fiber (Host) to
a Remote that already
has IP enabled on
another fiber (Host)
has been made.
The alarm is cleared if
IP is disabled on the
fiber. It is also cleared
if an ACK is later
received from the
Remote. This latter
condition can occur if
the fiber that was
already carrying IP
later has IP disabled,
or if the fiber
otherwise becomes
disabled. For
information on
setting Ip Enable, see
Configure the
Remote SeRF Optical
Ports on page 146
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
Managing Alarms
fwuRmtFanOverSpeedFault Minor Remote fan has an
Over Speed fault
Fan may require
replacement.
fwuRmtFanUnderSpeedFault Major Remote fan has an
Under Speed fault
Fan may require
cleaning and/ or
replacement.
fwuRmtOpenDoorFault Minor Door on the Remote is
open
Close the Remote
door
fwuHstSysCardPrimaryCPFault Major Primary Clock Priority
Fault
Set Primary CPL within
acceptable range
fwuHstSysCardSecondaryCPFault Minor Secondary Clock
Priority Fault
Set Secondary CPL
within acceptable
range
Alarm Name Alarm
Severity
Level
Description Action
12
SNMP INTERFACE
12.1 EMS SNMP Interface .......................................................................................260
12.2 SNMP Overview..............................................................................................261
12.2.1 Background Information on SNMP .............................................................262
12.2.2 MIB Used by FlexWave System.................................................................264
12.3 SNMP Procedures ...........................................................................................265
12.4 Accessing the FlexWave-Prism Agent MIB ..........................................................266
12.5 Configuring the Trap Viewer.............................................................................267
12.5.1 Registering the Manager for Receiving Traps (staticnon AdventNet MIB Browser)
267
12.5.2 Registering the Manager for Receiving Traps (dynamicAdventNet MIB Browser).
268
12.5.3 Viewing Traps.........................................................................................271
12.5.3.1 Date and Time Stamps ....................................................................271
12.5.3.2 Variable Bindings ............................................................................272
12.5.3.3 View the Traps................................................................................274
12.6 FlexWave-URH Agent MIB................................................................................276
12.7 Traps............................................................................................................292
Content Page
SNMP Interface
12.1 EMS SNMP INTERFACE
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is an international standard for remote
monitoring and control of online devices. The EMS provides an interface for those
wishing to access a Prism system using an SNMP manager such as the AdventNet
application shown in Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1. EMS SNMP Interface Example
The FlexWave EMS SNMP interface can manage FlexWave Prism and URH units. This
document describes how to use the SNMP interface with a Prism system.
SNMP Overview
12.2 SNMP OVERVIEW
The FlexWave system SNMP interface, shown schematically in Figure 12-2, allows a
remote user using an SNMP manager to access the same database as accessed by the
standard EMS interface. The database accessed is an SNMP database called a
Management Information Base (MIB).
Figure 12-2. SNMP Interface
This section describes the FlexWave system SNMP interface, and provides procedures
for using the SNMP interface to get and set system parameters and receive alarms.
In SNMP terminology, the parameters in a MIB are called objects and alarms are
called traps.
IP
IP
Web
GET/SET TRAP
75356-05
Windows 2000 or Windows XP
computer running
Internet Explorer 6.0
and/or SNMP Manager
MIB
EMS
INTERNAL
Network port
URH Host Unit
SNMP Interface
12.2.1 Background Information on SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is an international standard for remote
control of online devices. A typical scenario involves the devices being controlled,
remote computers (called managers) that can control them, a network connection,
and SNMP software. The SNMP software includes SNMP manager software on each
controlling computer and SNMP proxy agent software and one or more MIBs on
each of the controlled devices.
A MIB is a database defined in accordance with SNMP requirements. A MIB consists
of tables of objects used to exchange information between a manager and agent.
Information is exchanged using three basic operations: GET, SET, and TRAP. A
manager uses GET to obtain an object value from a MIB and SET to set an object to a
new value. A TRAP is a notification that is sent out by an agent when the value of a
trap object exceeds a threshold defining an alarm state.
In a manager browser, a MIB looks like an Explorer hierarchy of folders and files, as
shown in Figure 12-3. The items at the lowest level, analogous to files in the Explorer
view, are not files, however; they are objects that each represent one system
parameter (object) and its current value. MIB objects are arranged in tables. Each set
of objects (within a single folder) represents one such table. An object marked with a
key symbol indicates that view is the key value for that table.
SNMP Overview
Figure 12-3. MIB in MIB Browser
In the FlexWave system, the MIB accessed through the SNMP interface is the same
database as used by the EMS graphical user interface. There is therefore a one-to-one
correspondence between MIB objects and the parameters displayed in the EMS Web
pages. Likewise, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the SNMP trap objects
and the alarm indicator LEDs displayed on the EMS pages. The MIB object names and
the EMS page names for the same items differ in a way that can be easily figured out.
For example, the MIB object fwuHstDARTPassBand corresponds to the Host DART
Pass Band parameter on the Host DART Configuration and Alarm Details Page.
SNMP Interface
12.2.2 MIB Used by FlexWave System
The FlexWave system uses a single MIB called the ADC-FLEXWAVE-URH.mib. The MIB
resides on the SeRF card in the Host where the EMS software also runs. The SNMP
proxy agent software required for the interface with SNMP managers also resides and
runs on the Host SeRF card.
A complete list of the objects that compose the FlexWave-Prism Agent MIB are listed
in this section in two tables. Table 12-2 on Page 276 lists objects that may be accessed
for GET/SET operation. Table 12-3 on page 292 lists traps that are sent to SNMP
managers registered to receive them whenever the respective fault condition occurs.
SNMP Procedures
12.3 SNMP PROCEDURES
This topic contains procedures done at the SNMP manager to interact with the
FlexWave-Prism Agent MIB. Any SNMP manager may be used. These procedures are
illustrated with examples from an AdventNet MIB Browser.
Figure 12-4 shows the features of a typical MIB browser.
Figure 12-4. Typical MIB Browser
Examples shown in this chapter use the AdventNet MIB Browser. Some procedural
details may vary with another browser, but the basic steps are the same.
SNMP Interface
12.4 ACCESSING THE FLEXWAVE-PRISM AGENT MIB
The FlexWave-Prism Agent MIB can be accessed using any SNMP manager with an
active network connection. The IP address of the FlexWave-Prism Host must be
known and entered in the MIB browser.
1 On the manager computer, open the MIB Browser.
2 Load the ADC-FLEXWAVE-URH.mib file.
3 Enter the IP address of the Host of the FlexWave-Prism system in the text box
provided next to Host.
4 Enter the Port number as 8001.
5 Enter the Read Community as public and Write Community as private.
6 To see an overview the MIB content, expand the MIB tree.
Configuring the Trap Viewer
12.5 CONFIGURING THE TRAP VIEWER
Configuring a trap viewer enables it to receive traps from the FlexWave system.
12.5.1 Registering the Manager for Receiving Traps
(staticnon AdventNet MIB Browser)
To receive traps, the manager must first be registered with the FlexWave-Prism Agent
using the following procedure.
1 Open a telnet or ssh connection to the Host.
2 Stop the agent process with the following command: service URHagent stop
3 Edit / usr / l ocal / f wu/ conf / snmp/ v2manager t abl e. t xt and add a line for each
trap receiver that looks like this:
155. 226. 32. 101 8003 SNMP_VERSI ON_2c publ i c 30 5 ACTI VE
4 Start the agent process with the following command: service URHagent start
This procedure cannot be done with the AdventNet MIB Browser.
The balance of the line should be the same for all trap managers, except:
Replace 155.226.32.101 in the example with the IP address of the computer being
used by the trap manager.
8003 is the destination port used. The Default SNMP trap port is 162. Any port
number is supported.
You can't use both a static and dynamic trap agent configuration. You can only use one
or the other. If you configure static, the dynamic entries will be deleted.
SNMP Interface
12.5.2 Registering the Manager for Receiving Traps
(dynamicAdventNet MIB Browser)
To receive traps, the manager must first be registered with the FlexWave-Prism Agent
using the following procedure.
1 Open the MIB-browser and load the SNMP-TARGET-MIB.
2 Expand the MIB tree.
3 Set the common parameters such as Host, Port and Community, and Write
Community.
4 Select the snmpTargetAddrTable and then click on the View SNMP Data Table icon or
View -> SNMP Table.
5 In the window that opens, click Start.
6 In the window that opens, click Add to add the manager information.
SNMP Interface
7 Set the manager information as follows:
snmpTargetAddrNameany unique name
snmpTargetAddrDomain.1.3.6.1.6.1.1
snmpTargetAddrTAddressIP address of the machine where you want to receive
the traps, The port number should also be provided next to IP address (for
example, #8004)
snmpTargetAddrTimeouttimeout value
snmpTargetAddrRetryCountretry count
snmpTargetAddrTagListany string that will be used as a community string to
view the traps; the default community string is public
snmpTargetAddrParamsany string, usually group1
snmpTargetAddrStorageType3
8 Click OK.
The information given in Step 7 displays as a new row in the SNMP Table.
9 Click Close to close the SNMP Table.
You can't use both a static and dynamic trap agent configuration. You can only use one
or the other. If you configure dynamic, the static entries will be deleted.
12.5.3 Viewing Traps
This section describes how to view traps in the MIB Browser and how to interpret
responses.
12.5.3.1 Date and Time Stamps
The FlexWave MIB imports the date and time in the format of:
EEE, MMM dd, HH: mm: ss
Table 12-1 describes the date and time fields.
For example, Tuesday February 26 at 1:30:15 PM would be displayed as:
TUE, FEB 26, 13: 30: 15
Table 12-1. MIB Date and Time Stamp Fields
Field Contents Variable
EEE Three letter abbreviation for the day of the week SUN - SAT
MMM Three letter month abbreviation JAN - DEC
dd Two- digit day of the month 01- 31
HH Two- digit hour for a 24- hour clock; AM/ PM will not display 00 - 23
mm Two- digit minute 00 through 59
ss Two- digit second 00 through 59
SNMP Interface
12.5.3.2 Variable Bindings
For Host Traps, there are 9 variable bindings:
1 sysUpTime
2 snmpTrapOID
3 fwuTrapSequenceNumber
4 fwuTrapTimeStamp
5 fwuModuleNumber
6 fwuModuleType
7 fwuHstNumber
8 fwuHstName
9 fwuNotificationStatus
For Remote Traps, there are 11 variable bindings:
1 sysUpTime
2 snmpTrapOID
3 fwuTrapSequenceNumber
4 fwuTrapTimeStamp
5 fwuModuleNumber
6 fwuModuleType
7 fwuHstNumber
8 fwuHstName
9 fwuRmtNumber
10 fwuRmtName
11 fwuNotificationStatus
You can therefore determine the affected module based on the module number and
type (variable binding 5 and 6).
The module types are represented numerically as follows:
1 Host
2 Remote
3 SeRF
4 DART
5 SFP
6 RSI
7 RDI
8 Power Detector
9 LPA
10 LNA
11 Duplexer
12 GPS
SNMP Interface
12.5.3.3 View the Traps
1 In the AdventNet MIB Browser, click the Trap Viewer icon on the Toolbar.
The Trap Viewer dialog opens.
2 In the Port box, enter the desired port number. The default is 162.
3 (Optional) In the Community box, enter the community string for the incoming
traps. The default is public.
4 Click the Add button to add the Port and Community list to the Trap list (visible in
the TrapList list box).
5 Click the Load button to load the trap parser file.
6 Click the Start button. Trap Viewer begins to receive traps from the specified port
and community.
To receive traps using the manager, you must first register the manager using the
procedure in Registering the Manager for Receiving Traps (staticnon AdventNet MIB
Browser) on page 267 or in Registering the Manager for Receiving Traps
(dynamicAdventNet MIB Browser) on page 268.
The Port and Community list can be deleted by clicking the Delete Entry button.
The traps when received are listed in the Trap Table. The trap table has the
following five columns.
Classdefines the severity of the trap.
Typedefines the type of the trap or the inform request.
Sourcerepresents the IP address of the source from where the traps were
sent.
Dateshows the date and time when the trap was received.
Messagelists the VarBind list of the trap, if any.
The status of the trap is displayed in the status pane at the bottom of the dialog
box. Moreover, the Trap count and the inform count is displayed in the status
pane.
7 To log the received traps, select the Enable Logging check box. All the incoming
traps are logged to a file. The default name of the log file is trap.log.
8 To view the details of the traps, click on the Show Details button. You can also
right-click the trap in the trap table and select View Trap Details.
9 Click Stop to stop listening to the port.
10 To delete a trap, select the trap and click the Delete Entry button. You can also
right-click the trap in the trap table and select Delete the Selected Rows.
Another option in Trap Viewer is the ParserEditor. Trap Viewer can filter the incoming
traps according to certain criterion called the Parser Criteria. The configuration of
the criterion is made possible by using the ParserEditor.
SNMP Interface
12.6 FLEXWAVE-URH AGENT MIB
Objects in the FlexWave-URH Agent MIB divide into two types: GET/SET objects and
trap objects. This section describes the GET/SET objects. For information on trap
objects, see Traps on page 292.
Table 12-2 lists all objects within the FlexWave-URH Agent MIB that are available for
GET and/or SET commands. Objects that are available for SET commands are also
available for GET commands.
For each SNMP syntax, there is a range of values defined in the MIB file. These are the
possible values that can be entered in a SET command and returned in a GET
command.
You can also Enable or Disable masking, which sets whether the trap will be raised
(Disable) or not (Enable). Thresholds dictate when a trap will be activated. Table 12-2
lists all FlexWave-URH Agent MIB objects for which traps, masks and thresholds are
sent to the SNMP manager.
Table 12-2. FlexWave-URH Agent MIB GET/SET Objects
Object Name Description SNMP Syntax Get
or
SET
fwuTrapSequenceNumber Total number of traps raised by
the agent.
Counter32 GET
fwuTrapTimeStamp Time stamp when trap was
raised.
DateAndTime GET
fwuHstOverTempFaultMask Show masking status of Over
Temperature fault. Masking is
disabled by default. If enabled,
the trap will not be raised.
MASKType SET
fwuHstUnderTempFaultMask Show status of masking of
Under Temperature fault.
Masking is disabled by default.
If enabled, the trap will not be
raised.
MASKType SET
fwuHstSERFFPGAStatus Host SeRF Card FPGA status
where 0 indicates that the SeRF
can talk to the FPGA and 1
indicates that it cannot
INTEGER GET
fwuHstSysCardRIADCPartNumber Remote Inventory Data- ADC
Part Number
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSysCardRISerialNumber Remote Inventory Data- Serial
Number
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSysCardRIDateCode Remote Inventory Data- Date
Code
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSysCardRIHWVer Remote Inventory
Data- Hardware Version
DisplayString GET
FlexWave-URH Agent MIB
fwuHstSysCard10MhzRefClock System Card Reference clock,
which can be can be internal (0)
or external (1)
INTEGER SET
fwuHstSysCardCPLevel System Card Master Clock
Priority Level, which can be
from 0 to 15
Integer SET
fwuHstSysCardFanFaultMask Host System Card Fan Fault
Mask. The alarm is disabled by
default. Enable the alarm by
setting it to enabled (1).
MASKType SET
fwuHstSysCardPrimaryCPFaultMask Primary Clock Priority Fault
MASKType SET
fwuHstSysCardSecondaryCPFaultMask Secondary Clock Priority Fault
MASKType SET
fwuHstOverTempThreshold Host System Card Over
Temperature threshold value.
This is not user settable.
Integer32 SET
fwuHstUnderTempThreshold Host System Card Under
Temperature Threshold value.
This is not user settable.
Integer32 SET
fwuRmtSERFFPGAStatus Remote SeRF Card FPGA status
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtRSIRIADCPartNumber Remote Inventory Data- ADC
Part Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtRSIRISerialNumber Remote Inventory Data- Serial
Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtRSIRIDateCode Remote Inventory Data- Date
Code
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtRSIRIHWVer Remote Inventory
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtCapacity The number of RF Modules that
can be installed in the Remote
(1 - 4)
Unsigned32 GET
fwuHstNumber FlexWave URH Host Number HOSTNBRType GET
fwuHstName User assigned name of the
Host. It can be 40 characters
long
DisplayString SET
fwuHstUnitReset Host SeRF card can be reset by
setting a value of 1
INTEGER SET
Table 12-2. FlexWave-URH Agent MIB GET/SET Objects (Cont.)
or
SET
SNMP Interface
fwuHstBackPlaneRev Revision of Host back plane. DisplayString GET
fwuHstAlarmStatusSummary Host Alarm Status Summary,
where the severity of the alarm
is:
Normal = 1
Minor = 2
Major = 3
Not Present = 0
ALARMType GET
fwuHstTempMeas Host system temperature value
in Celsius
DisplayString GET
fwuSystemAlarmStatusSummary System Alarm Status Summary,
where the severity of the alarm
is:
Normal = 1
Minor = 2
Major = 3
Not Present = 0
ALARMType GET
fwuHstLinkingMode System Linking mode for DART
linking
Integer SET
fwuHstMajorContactAlarmOutput Host Major contact output port
state
CONTACTType GET
fwuHstMinorContactAlarmOutput Host Minor contact output port
state
CONTACTType GET
fwuRmtMajorContactAlarmOutput Remote Major contact output
port state
CONTACTType GET
fwuRmtMinorContactAlarmOutput Remote Minor contact output
port state
CONTACTType GET
fwuSystemAlarmSequenceNumber Defines the index of the Alarm
Table
Unsigned32 GET
fwuSystemAlarmAgentUpTime Agent up time TimeTicks GET
fwuSystemAlarmType Trap OID of the Alarm OBJECT
IDENTIFIER
GET
fwuSystemAlarmHstNumber Host number from which the
alarm has been raised
HOSTNBRType GET
fwuSystemAlarmHstName Name of the Host from which
the alarm has been raised
DisplayString GET
fwuSystemAlarmRmtNumber Remote number from which the
REMOTENBRTy
pe
GET
fwuSystemAlarmRmtName Remote name from which the
DisplayString GET
or
SET
fwuSystemAlarmModuleType Type of module raising the
alarm
MODULEType GET
fwuSystemAlarmModuleNumber Identifier of the module raising
the alarm.
Integer32 GET
fwuSystemAlarmSeverity This object gives the severity of
this Alarm notification.
Normal = 1
Minor = 2
Major = 3
Not Present = 0
ALARMType GET
fwuSystemAlarmTimeStamp Time stamp of the Alarm DateAndTime GET
fwuHstSERFLinuxKernelVer Linux Kernel Version of the
Host system
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFLinuxBootLoaderVer Boot Loader Version of the Host
system
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFCompactFlashSWVer Compact Flash Version of the
Host system
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFFPGAVer Version of FPGA image loaded
on SeRF
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFPPCSNMPHTTPAgentSWVer Software Version of the
HTTP/ SNMP agent running on
Host
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFPPCHWMonSWVer Software Version of the
Hardware Monitor process
running on the Host
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFPPCAPPMonSWVer Software Version of the
Application Monitor process
running on the Host
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFPPCMATEMonSWVer Software Version of the Mate
Monitor process running on the
Host
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFPPCENETMonSWVer Software Version of the
Ethernet Monitor process
running on the Host
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFPPCFPGAMonSWVer Software Version of the FPGA
Monitor process running on the
Host
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFRIDateCode Host SeRF Inventory- Date Code DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFRIHWVer Host SeRF Inventory- Hardware
Version
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFRISerialNumber Host SeRF Inventory- Serial
Number
DisplayString GET
or
SET
SNMP Interface
fwuHstSERFRIADCPartNumber Host SeRF Inventory- ADC Part
Number
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFOptSFPNumber SFP Number- Optical Port
number (from 1 to 8)
INTEGER GET
fwuHstSERFOptSFPName User defined name of the SFP
Optical Port that can be up to
32 characters long
DisplayString SET
fwuHstSERFOptSFPType SFP Type- Optical Port Type OPTICSType GET
fwuHstSERFOptSFPTxColor SFP wavelength in nanometer Integer32 GET
fwuHstSERFOptRevLaunchPowerMeas Value of Host Receive
measured optical power in dBm
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFOptFwdLaunchPowerMeas Value of Host Transmit
measured optical power in dBm
DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFOptMateName Name of Host Mates DisplayString GET
fwuHstSERFIPEnable IP Enable mode for Host
carrying RF, where 1 equals
enable
Integer SET
fwuHstSERFOptRxBERFaultThreshold Threshold Value for declaring a
Decoded word error state of the
primary wavelength optical
receiver (too many errors)
DisplayString SET
fwuHstSERFOptOverDriveFaultThreshld Threshold value for declaring
SFP over drive fault. This is not
user settable.
Integer32 SET
fwuHstSERFOptUnderDriveFaultThreshld Threshold value for declaring
SFP under drive fault. This is
not user settable.
Integer32 SET
fwuHstSERFOptRxBERFaultMask Shows the masking status of
receiver; masking is disabled
by default; if enabled, the trap
will not be raised.
MASKType SET
fwuHstSERFOptOverDriveFaultMask Shows the masking status of
SFP Over Drive Fault; masking
is disabled by default; if
enabled, the trap will not be
raised.
MASKType SET
fwuHstSERFOptUnderDriveFaultMask Shows the masking status of
Under Drive Fault. Masked is
MASKType SET
fwuHstSERFOptIpEnableFaultMask Shows the masking status of
the IP Enable Fault. Masked is
MASKType SET
or
SET
fwuHstSERFEthPortNumber A unique identifier for each
Ethernet port (from 1 to 12)
Unsigned32 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortType Identifies the type of Ethernet
port
ENETType GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortRxBytes Receive byte counter Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortRxPkts Receive packet counter Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortRxFcsErrors Receive FCS error counter Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortRxBroadcastPkts Receive Broadcast packet
counter
Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortRxMulticastPkts Receive Multicast packet
counter
Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortRxFragmtdFrames Receive fragments counter Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortRxJabbersFrames Receive jabber counter Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortTxByteCounter Transmit byte counter Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortTxPkts Transmit packet counter Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortTxBroadcastPkts Transmit broadcast packet
counter
Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortTxMulticastPkts Transmit multicast packet
counter
Counter64 GET
fwuHstSERFEthPortSFPId Identifier of SFP to which this
Ethernet port connects
Unsigned32 GET
fwuHstDARTNumber A unique identifier for each
DART Card Object (from 1 to 8)
Integer32 GET
fwuHstDARTName A user defined name for each
DART Card object that can be
up to 32 characters long
DisplayString SET
fwuHstDARTBandType Band type of Host DART card BANDType GET
fwuHstDARTPassBand Pass- band type of host DART
card.
PASSBANDType SET
fwuHstDARTOperatingMode Operating mode of Host DART
card
MODEType SET
fwuHstDARTDiversityStatus Diversity Status of Host DART
card, where diversity is 1 and
no diversity is 0
INTEGER SET
fwuHstDARTForwardGain Primary Gain in forward path of
Host DART card
GAINType SET
fwuHstDARTReverseGain Primary Gain in reverse path of
Host DART card
GAINType SET
or
SET
SNMP Interface
fwuHstDARTFPGAStatus Indicates if the Host SeRF FPGA
can talk to the DART FPGA
INTEGER GET
fwuHstDARTFPGAProgramVer FPGA Version on the Host DART
card
DisplayString GET
fwuHstDARTRIADCPartNumber Host DART Inventory Data- ADC
Part Number
DisplayString GET
fwuHstDARTRISerialNumber Host DART Inventory
Data- Serial Number
DisplayString GET
fwuHstDARTRIDateCode Host DART Inventory Data -
Date Code
DisplayString GET
fwuHstDARTRIHWVer Host DART Inventory
DisplayString GET
fwuHstDARTRowStatus Status of this conceptual row RowStatus SET
fwuHstDARTOverDriveFaultThreshold Threshold value for Host DART
Card Over Drive. This is not
user settable.
DisplayString SET
fwuHstDARTUnderDriveFaultThreshold Threshold value for Host DART
Card Under Drive. This is not
user settable.
DisplayString SET
fwuRmtNumber The Remote number of Remote
connected (from 1 to 8)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtCatalogState Catalog state of Remote. If
fwuRmtCatalogState is
commission (2) state,
commission Remote. If it is in
normal (1) state, do not
commission Remote
CATALOGType GET
fwuRmtName User defined name of the
Remote, which can be up to 40
characters long
DisplayString SET
fwuRmtAlarmStatusSummary Summary of alarm status of all
connected remote units where:
Normal = 1
Minor = 2
Major = 3
Not Present = 0
ALARMType GET
fwuRmtTempMeasurement Temperature of each Remote in
Celsius. This value comes from
the RSI
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtGeneralTableRowStatus Status of this conceptual row RowStatus SET
or
SET
fwuRmtType Type of Remote: Prism or URH REMOTEType GET
fwuRmtSERFLinuxKernelVer Linux Kernel Version of the
Remote system
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFLinuxBootLoaderVer Linux Boot loader Version of
the Remote system
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFCompactFlashSWVer Compact Flash Software
Version of the Remote system
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFFPGAVer Version of FPGA loaded on SeRF DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFPPCHWMonSWVer Hardware monitor process
Software Version of the Remote
system
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFPPCAPPMonSWVer Application monitor process
Software Version of the Remote
system
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFPPCGPSMonSWVer GPS monitor process Software
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFPPCSNMPHTTPAgentSWVer SNMP agent Software Version
of the Remote system
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFPPCMATEMonSWVer Mate monitor process Software
Version of the remote system.
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFPPCENETMonSWVer ENET monitor process Software
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFPPCFPGAMonSWVer FPGA monitor process Software
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFRIDateCode Remote SeRF Inventory- Date
Code of the Remote system
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFRIHWRev Remote SeRF Inventory -
Hardware Version of the
Remote system
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFRISerialNumber Remote SeRF Inventory- Serial
Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFRIADCPartNumber Remote SeRF Inventory- ADC
Part Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFOptSFPNumber A unique identifier of each SFP
(from 1 to 8)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtSERFOptSFPName User defined name of each
Remote SFP.It can be 32
character long.
DisplayString SET
fwuRmtSERFOptSFPType SFP Type- Optical Port Type OPTICSType GET
fwuRmtSERFOptSFPColor SFP wavelength in nanometer. Integer32 GET
or
SET
SNMP Interface
fwuRmtSERFOptRevLaunchPowerMeas Value of Remote Receive
measured optical power in dbm
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFOptFwdLaunchPowerMeas Value of Remote Transmit
measured optical power in dbm
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFOptMateName Name of Remote mate DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSERFIPEnable IP Enable mode for Host
connected to the Remote that is
carrying RF, where 1 equals
enable
Integer GET
fwuRmtSERFOptRxBERFaultThreshold Threshold Value for declaring a
Decoded word error state of the
receiver (too many errors). This
is not user settable.
DisplayString SET
fwuRmtSerfOptOverDriveFaultThreshld Threshold value for declaring
SFP over drive fault. This is not
user settable.
Integer32 SET
fwuRmtSerfOptUnderDriveFaultThreshld Threshold value for declaring
SFP under drive fault. This is
not user settable.
Integer32 SET
fwuRmtSERFOptRxBERFaultMask Trap enable/ disable for
receiver; trap is enabled by
default; if disabled, the trap will
not be raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtSERFOptOverDriveFaultMask Trap enable/ disable for SFP
Over Drive Fault. Trap is
enabled by default. If disabled,
MASKType SET
fwuRmtSERFOptUnderDriveFaultMask Trap enable/ disable for SFP
Under Drive Fault; trap is
enabled by default; if disabled,
the trap will not be raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortNumber A unique identifier for each
Ethernet port (from 1 to 12)
Unsigned32 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortType An identifier for the type of
Ethernet port
ENETType GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortRxBytes Receive byte counter Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortRxPkts Receive packet counter Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortRxFscErrors Receive FCS error counter Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortRxBroadcastPkts Receive broadcast packet
counter
Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortRxMulticastPkts Receive multicast packet
counter
Counter64 GET
or
SET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortRxFragmtdFrames Receive fragments counter Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortRxJabbersFrames Receive jabber counter Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortTxByteCounter Transmit byte counter Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortTxPkts Transmit packet counter Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortTxBroadcastPkts Transmit multicast packet
counter
Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthPortTxMulticastPkts Transmit broadcast packet
counter
Counter64 GET
fwuRmtSERFEthSFPID Identifier of SFP to which this
Ethernet port connects to
Unsigned32 GET
fwuRmtDARTNumber A unique identifier for each
DART Card Object of Remote
(from 1 to 8)
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtDARTName A user defined name for each
DART Card object of Remote,
which can be up to 32
characters
DisplayString SET
fwuRmtDARTBandType Band type of Remote DART card BANDType GET
fwuRmtDARTPassBand Pass- band type of remote
DART card.
PASSBANDType SET
fwuRmtDARTOperatingMode Operating mode of Remote
DART card
MODEType SET
fwuRmtDARTDiversityStatus Diversity Status of Remote
DART card, where diversity is 1
and no diversity is 0
INTEGER SET
fwuRmtDARTForwardGain Primary Gain in forward path of
Remote DART card
GAINType SET
fwuRmtDARTReverseGain Primary Gain in reverse path of
Remote DART card
GAINType GET
fwuRmtDARTForwardDelay Forward Delay for Remote
DART card Micro Seconds (from
1 to 500). If the Forward Delay
value is not equal to Actual
Forward Delay value then, then
a Ranging fault will be raised if
the Remote DART is Linked
DELAYType SET
fwuRmtDARTReverseDelay Reverse Delay for Remote DART
card Micro Seconds (from 1 to
500). If the Reverse Delay value
is not equal to the Actual
Reverse Delay value then, then
a Ranging fault will be raised if
the Remote DART is linked
DELAYType SET
or
SET
SNMP Interface
fwuRmtDARTTempMeas Temperature value of Remote
DART card
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtDARTFPGAStatus Indicates if the Remote SeRF
FPGA can talk to DART FPGA
can talk to the DART and 1
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtDARTFPGAProgramVer FPGA Version on the Remote
DART card
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtDARTRIADCPartNumber Remote DART Inventory
Data- ADC Part Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtDARTRISerialNumber Remote DART Inventory
Data- Serial Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtDARTRIDateCode Remote DART Inventory Data -
Date Code
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtDARTRIHWVer Remote DART Inventory
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtDARTGeneralTableRowStatus Status of a row in the DART
General table
RowStatus SET
fwuRmtDARTActualForwardDelay Forward Delay for Remote
DART
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtDARTForwardLowerboundDelay Lower bound forward delay
value
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtDARTForwardUpperboundDelay Upper bound delay value Integer32 GET
fwuRmtDARTActualReverseDelay Reverse Delay for Remote DART Integer32 GET
fwuRmtDARTReverseLowerboundDelay Lower bound Reverse delay
value
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtDARTReverseUpperboundDelay Upper bound Reverse delay
value
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtDARTOverTempFaultMask Masking status of DART over
Temp fault; masking is
disabled by default.If enabled
trap will not raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtDARTUnderTempFaultMask Masking status of DART under
Temp fault. Masking is disabled
by default.If enabled trap will
not raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtDARTOverTempThreshold Threshold value for remote
DART over temperature. This is
not user settable.
MASKType SET
fwuRmtDARTUnderTempThreshold Threshold value for remote
DART under temperature. This
MASKType SET
or
SET
fwuRmtGPSLongitudeDegrees The GPS Longitude in Degrees
(from - 180 to 180)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtGPSLongitudeMinutes The GPS Longitude in Minutes
(from - 59 to 59)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtGPSLongitudeSeconds The GPS Longitude in
milliseconds (from - 5999 to
5999)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtGPSLatitudeDegrees The GPS Latitude in Degrees
(from - 180 to 180)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtGPSLatitudeMinutes The GPS Latitude in Minutes
(from - 59 to 59)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtGPSLatitudeSeconds The GPS Latitude in
milliseconds (from - 5999 to
5999)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtGPSAltitudeMeters The GPS Altitude in Meters
(from - 180 to 180)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtGPSNumberOfSatellite The Number of satellites
discovered (from - 180 to 180)
INTEGER GET
fwuRmtGPSFaultMask Shows masking status of GPS
Fault; masking is disabled by
default; if enabled, the trap will
not be raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtLPANumber A unique identifier for an LPA
(from 1 to 4)
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtLPAReset Set this object to a value of 1 to
cause LPA to reset itself.
Normal value is 0
INTEGER SET
fwuRmtLPAOpState Operating mode of Remote
LPA, where normal is 0 and
standby is 1
INTEGER SET
fwuRmtPowerDetectorNumber A unique identifier for each
power detector (from 1 to 4)
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtSystemVSWRMeas VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio) measurement
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtRFPowerOutputMeas The value of Remote RF Power
Output in dBm
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtPwrDetectorBoardRIADCPartNum Power Detector Inventory- ADC
Part Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtPwrDetectorBoardRISerialNum Power Detector
Inventory- Serial Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtPwrDetectorBoardRIDateCode Power Detector Inventory- Date
Code
DisplayString GET
or
SET
SNMP Interface
fwuRmtPwrDetectorBoardRIHWVer Power Detector
Inventory- Hardware Version
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtSystemVSWRFaultMask System VSWR (Voltage Standing
Wave Ratio) Fault
MASKType SET
fwuRmtNoRFPowerFaultMask No RF Power Fault MASKType SET
fwuRmtSystemVSWRFaultThreshold Threshold value for System
VSWR (Voltage Standing Wave
Ratio) Fault. This is not user
settable.
Integer32 SET
fwuRmtLNANumber A unique identifier for LNA
Objects (from 1 to 8)
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtLNAType Remote LNA card type BANDType GET
fwuRmtLNARIADCPartNumber LNA Inventory Data- ADC Part
Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtLNARISerialNumber LNA Inventory Data- Serial
Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtLNARIDateCode LNA Inventory Data- Date Code DisplayString GET
fwuRmtLNARIHWVer LNA Inventory Data- Hardware
Version.
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtLNAPowerFaultMask Shows masking status of
Remote LNA Power Fault;
masking is disabled by default;
if enabled, the trap will not be
raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtRDINumber A unique identifier for each RDI
(from 1 to 4)
Integer32 GET
fwuRmtRDIRIADCPartNumber RDI Inventory Data- ADC Part
Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtRDIRISerialNumber RDI Inventory Data- Serial
Number
DisplayString GET
fwuRmtRDIRIDateCode RDI Inventory Data- Date Code DisplayString GET
fwuRmtRDIRIHWVer RDI Inventory Data- Hardware
Version
DisplayString GET
fwuHstDARTOverDriveFaultMask Shows masking status of Host
DART Over Drive Fault;
raised
MASKType SET
fwuHstDARTUnderDriveFaultMask Shows masking status of Host
DART Under Drive Fault;
raised
MASKType SET
or
SET
fwuRmtOverTempFaultMask Show status of masking of
Remote over temperature Fault;
raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtUnderTempFaultMask Show status of masking of
Remote Under Temperature
Fault; masking is disabled by
default; if enabled, the trap will
not be raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtOpenDoorFaultMask Show status of masking of
Remote Open Door Fault;
raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtFanOverSpeedFaultMask Show status of masking of
Remote Fan Over Speed Fault;
raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtFanUnderSpeedFaultMask Show status of masking of
Remote Fan Under Speed Fault;
raised
MASKType SET
fwuRmtOverTempFaultThreshold Threshold value for remote
over temperature Fault. This is
not user settable.
MASKType SET
fwuRmtUnderTempFaultThreshold Threshold value for remote
under temperature Fault. This
MASKType SET
fwuHMmonIndex Index of mate monitor table. Integer32 GET
fwuHMmonRmtLocation Location of Remote connected
to Host
DisplayString GET
fwuHMmonRmtIPAddress IP addresses of Remote IpAddress GET
fwuHMmonRmtID ID of connected Remote REMOTENBRTy
pe
GET
fwuHMmonHstSideSFPID Slot ID of the SFP at Host end. Integer32 GET
fwuHMmonRmtSideSFPID Slot ID of the SFP used at
Remote end
Integer32 GET
fwuRMmonIndex Index of mate monitor table Integer32 GET
fwuRMmonHstIPAddress IP addresses of Host connected
to the Remote
IpAddress GET
fwuRMmonHstID ID of Host connected to the
Remote
HOSTNBRType GET
or
SET
SNMP Interface
fwuRMmonRmtID ID of companion remote unit. REMOTENBRTy
pe
GET
fwuRMmonHstSideSFPID Slot ID of the SFP at Host end Integer32 GET
fwuRMmonRmtSideSFPID Slot ID of the SFP used at
Remote end.
Integer32 GET
fwuGeoHeartbeatTimer Specifies Heartbeat can be sent
at the timer specified here,
from 1 to 30
INTEGER SET
fwuGeoIndex Geo objects Table Index. Unsigned32 SET
fwuGeoLatitude Identifies the Latitude of
Remote
DisplayString SET
fwuGeoLongitude Identifies the Longitude of
Remote
DisplayString SET
fwuGeoRmtName Identifies the Latitude of
Remote
DisplayString GET
fwuGeoStatus Identifies the Latitude of
Remote
INTEGER GET
fwuDARTMappingIndex Index of the DART table. Unsigned32 GET
fwuHstID ID of the Host HOSTNBRType SET
fwuHstDARTID ID of DART at Host to which the
Remote DART is to be
connected (from 1 to 8)
INTEGER SET
fwuHstSFPID ID of host side SFP ID
connected toward the remote
DART. (from 1 to 8)
INTEGER SET
fwuHstDARTPassBand Pass- band type of Host DART
card
PASSBANDType GET
fwuRmtID ID of the Remote from which
DART is to be connected
REMOTENBRTy
pe
SET
fwuRmtDARTID ID of Remote DART to which the
Host DART will connect (from 1
to 8)
INTEGER SET
fwuRmtSFPID ID of Remote side SFP ID
connected toward the Host
DART (from 1 to 8)
INTEGER SET
fwuRmtDARTPassband Remote side Band- PassBand
information of the linked darts
PASSBANDType GET
fwuHstSFPStartTimeSlot Start timeslot on the fiber that
is carrying the DART traffic.
This is a read- write object but
it is not available for user to do
a RW operation.
Integer32 SET
or
SET
fwuHstSFPEndTimeSlot End timeslot on the fiber that is
carrying the RF traffic from
Host to Remote DART card.
This is a Read- Write object, but
is not available for user as a
Read- Write operation.
Integer32 SET
fwuMappingStatus Status of row RowStatus SET
fwuRmtUnitReset Provides a way to reset the
Remote SeRF card. Set to 1 to
trigger a Remote reset
INTEGER SET
or
SET
SNMP Interface
12.7 TRAPS
The EMS receives traps from SNMP agents and converts them to alarms and
non-alarmed events for further processing and reporting.
For information on GET/SET objects, see FlexWave-URH Agent MIB on page 276.
Table 12-3. FlexWave-URH Agent MIB Traps
Trap Object Description
fwuHstSysCardFanFault Host System Card Fan fault
fwuHstModuleMissingFault Host Module missing fault
fwuHstOverTempFault Host Over Temperature fault
fwuHstUnderTempFault Host Under Temperature fault
fwuRmtModuleMissingFault Remote Module missing fault
fwuRmtOverTempFault Remote Over Temperature fault
fwuRmtUnderTempFault Remote Under Temperature fault
fwuRmtOpenDoorFault Door on the Remote is open
fwuRmtFanOverSpeedFault Remote fan has an Over Speed fault
fwuRmtFanUnderSpeedFault Remote fan has an Under Speed fault
fwuHstSERFSynthAlarmFault Onboard synthesizer fault
fwuHstSERFFault Consolidation of SeRF Onboard synthesizer fault and SeRF
FPGA Status
fwuHstSERFRmtLostFault Remote Lost fault- Host not receiving any messages from
connected Remote
fwuHstSERFOptRxBERFault Decoded word error state of the primary wavelength optical
fwuHstSERFOptRxNoLightFault Receiving light state of the primary wavelength optical
receiver (no light)
fwuHstSERFOptLaserFault Error state of laser forward path
fwuHstSERFOptOverDriveFault Host SFP Over Drive fault
fwuHstSERFOptUnderDriveFault Host SFP Under Drive fault
fwuHstSERFOptIpEnableFault Host SFP IP Enable fault
fwuHstDARTDwnCon1SynLockFault Lock State of the first Down Converter synthesizer
fwuHstDARTDwnCon2SynLockFault Lock State of the second Down Converter synthesizer
fwuHstDARTUpConSynLockFault Lock State of the Up Converter synthesizer
fwuHstDARTOverDriveFault Host DART Card Over Drive fault. RF signal received from BTS
is too high
Traps
fwuHstDARTUnderDriveFault Host DART Card Under Drive fault. RF Signal received from
the BTS is too low
fwuHstDARTFault This fault is a consolidated fault of
fwuHstDARTDwnCon1SynLockFault,
fwuHstDARTDwnCon2SynLockFault,
fwuHstDARTUpConSynLockFault,
fwuHstDARTFPGAStatus and fwuHstDARTDCSupplyFault
fwuHstDARTDCSupplyFault Host DART Card DC Supply fault
fwuHstDARTHardwareMismatchFault Indicates a hardware mismatch for the RF and optical cards
between Host and Remotes
fwuRmtAcPowerSupplyFault Remote AC Power Supply fault. This is an aggregation of
ACPowerSupplyMonitor1, ACPowerSupplyMonitor2,
ACPowerSupplyMonitor3, ACPowerSupplyMonitor4
fwuRmtMajorExtAlarmInputFault The remote Major Ext Alarm Input Fault
fwuRmtMinorExtAlarmInputFault The remote Minor Ext Alarm Input Fault
fwuRmtSERFHstLostFault Host Lost fault- Remote not receiving any messages from
connected Host
fwuRmtSERFOptRxBERFault Decoded word error state of the primary wavelength optical
fwuRmtSERFOptRxNoLightFault Receiving light state of the primary wavelength optical
receiver (no light)
fwuRmtSERFOptLaserFault Error state of laser forward path
fwuRmtSERFOptOverDriveFault Remote SFP Over Drive fault
fwuRmtSERFOptUnderDriveFault Remote SFP Under Drive Fault
fwuRmtSERFSynthAlarmFault Onboard synthesizer fault
fwuRmtSERFFault Consolidation of SeRF Onboard synthesizer fault and SeRF
FPGA Status
fwuRmtDARTDwnCon1SynLockFault Lock state of the first down converter synthesizer
fwuRmtDARTDwnCon2SynLockFault Lock state of the second down converter synthesizer
fwuRmtDARTUpConSynLockFault Lock state of the Upconverter synthesizer
fwuRmtDARTDCSupplyFault Remote DART Card DC Supply fault
fwuRmtDARTFault Consolidated fault for
fwuRmtDARTDwnCon1SynLockFault,
fwuRmtDARTDwnCon2SynLockFault,
fwuRmtDARTUpConSynLockFault,
fwuRmtDARTDCSupplyFault and DARTFPGAStatus
fwuRmtDARTHardwareMismatchFault Indicate the hardware mismatch for the RF DART card
between Host and Remotes
fwuRmtRangingFault Host cannot auto- range a connected Remote anymore
Table 12-3. FlexWave-URH Agent MIB Traps (Cont.)
SNMP Interface
fwuRmtDARTOverTempFault indicates a Remote DART Card Over Temperature Fault
fwuRmtDARTUnderTempFault Indicate the Remote DART Card Under Temperature Fault
fwuRmtGPSFault Remote GPS fault
fwuRmtLPADisableFault Disable state of the linear power amplifier
fwuRmtLPAOverPowerFault Internal over power fault state of linear power amplifier
(power level is high enough to damage LPA)
fwuRmtLPAHighTempFault Remote LPA High Temperature fault
fwuRmtLPAVswrFault Internal VSWR fault state of linear power amplifier (greater
than 3:1)
fwuRmtLPADcFault Remote LPA DC fault
fwuRmtLPALoopFault Remote LPA Loop fault
fwuRmtLPALowPowerFault Internal low power fault state of linear power amplifier (the
gain of one or more internal amplifiers does not meet
specification)
fwuRmtLPADetectFault Presence fault state of linear power amplifier (the LPA is
missing)
fwuRmtSystemVswrFault Remote system Vswr fault
fwuRmtNoRFPowerFault Remote No RF Power fault
fwuRmtLNAPowerFault Remote LNA power fault
fwuRmtFanFault Remote system VSWR fault. This object hasn't been
implemented in this release
fwuRmtACPowerSupplyMon4Fault AC Power monitor 4 Fault
fwuHstSysCardPrimaryCPFault Primary Clock Priority Fault
fwuHstSysCardSecondaryCPFault Secondary Clock Priority Fault
Table 12-3. FlexWave-URH Agent MIB Traps (Cont.)
PART IV
APPENDICES

A
HOST UNIT MODULE REPLACEMENT
A.1 Host Fan Replacement Procedure .......................................................................298
A.2 Power Supply Replacement Procedure ................................................................299
A.3 System Card Replacement Procedure..................................................................301
A.4 SeRF Card Replacement Procedure .....................................................................303
A.4.1 Preserve System Configuration...................................................................303
A.4.2 Remove the SeRF Card..............................................................................306
A.4.3 Swap Compact Flash From Old SeRF Card to New SeRF Card..........................307
A.4.4 Install New SeRF Card...............................................................................308
A.5 DART Card Replacement/Installation Procedure....................................................309
A.5.1 Replacing a DART Card in the Host Chassis ..................................................309
A.5.2 Installing a New DART Card in the Host Chassis............................................309
This section provides the Host maintenance procedures. Refer to this section when
scheduled maintenance is required.
Recommendation: The replacement interval for the Host fan is 60 months.
Content Page

A.1 HOST FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Continuous airflow for cooling is provided by a fan assembly mounted on the left side
of the Host housing. The cooling fans blow cool air into the enclosure. Heated air is
exhausted through the vent openings on the right side of the enclosure. An alarm is
generated if a high temperature condition (>90 C/122 F) occurs. The fan assembly
may be field-replaced if either fan fails. Replacement of fan assembly does not
require that the Host be turned off.
Recommendation: The replacement interval for the Host fan is 60 months.
Use the following procedure to remove and replace the Host cooling fans:
1 Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that the fan is being
replaced.
2 Loosen the two thumb screws that secure the fan/grill assembly to the front of
the Host enclosure.
3 Carefully withdraw the fan/grill assembly from the enclosure.
4 Slide the new fan assembly into the Host chassis until it is firmly seated.
5 Secure the fan/grill assembly to the front of the enclosure using the two screws
loosened in Step 2.
6 Verify that the fans run properly following power-up.
7 Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that the fans are back in
operation.
Electronic components can be damaged by static electrical discharge. To prevent ESD
damage, slip on an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect the ground wire
to an earth ground source. Wear the ESD wrist strap while completing each step in this
procedure.
22396-A
FAN
ASSEMBLY
THUMB
SCREWS
Power Supply Replacement Procedure
A.2 POWER SUPPLY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1 Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that the system will be out
of service for a period of time.
2 Turn power switch to the OFF position.
3 Unplug power plug by applying pressure to the left and right side of the connector
and pulling it straight out.
4 Loosen the two thumb screws that secure the Power Supply to the front of the
Host enclosure.
5 Carefully withdraw the Power Supply from the enclosure.
6 Slide replacement Power Supply into the Host chassis until it is firmly seated.
7 Secure the Power Supply to the front of the enclosure using the two thumb screws
loosened in Step 4.
8 Verify that the power switch is in its OFF position, and then plug power plug into
the power connector on the front of the Power Supply. Make certain that it is fully
seated.
Removing the power supply disables the Host and interrupts service.
procedure.
22400-A

9 Turn power switch to the ON position.
10 Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that the system is back in
operation.
System Card Replacement Procedure
A.3 SYSTEM CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1 Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that the System Card is
being replaced.
2 If used, disconnect EXT REF cables from the front of the System Card.
3 Remove alarm plug from the front of the System Card by pressing on the lock
tabs.
4 Loosen the two thumb screws that secure the System Card to the front of the Host
enclosure.
There will be a Loss of Service during the time it takes to complete this procedure. Notify
the NOC and alarm managers before starting this process.
If the EXT REF is being used communications to other Hosts will be disrupted.
damage, slip on an Electro- Static Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect the ground
wire to an earth ground source. Wear the ESD wrist strap while completing each step in
this procedure.
22398-A

5 Carefully withdraw the System Card from the enclosure.
6 Slide replacement System Card into the Host chassis until it is firmly seated.
7 Secure the System Card to the front of the enclosure using the two thumb screws
loosened in Step 4.
8 If used, connect EXT REF cables to the front of the System Card.
9 Plug alarm plug into the connector on the System Card.
operation.
SeRF Card Replacement Procedure
A.4 SERF CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Replacing the SeRF card is a 14-step procedure that is broken into four sections,
Follow the steps in the order given.
A.4.1 Preserve System Configuration
1 Before you start the procedure to replace the SeRF card, decide how you will
restore the system configuration, which can be accomplished in one of two ways:
Option AYou can remove the Compact Flash card from the old SeRF and
install it into the new SeRF before installing the SeRF card in the Host.
Option BYou can reconfigure the system once the new SeRF is installed. If
you are going to reconfigure the system, before you remove the SeRF card,
record the system settings in Table A-1, including frequency bands, gain and
delay settings, module names and network information.
Removing the SeRF Card will disable the Host and interrupt service. The entire system
configuration is stored on the Compact Flash card on the SeRF. If you replace the SeRF
with a new one, the system will NOT be operational immediately following replacement.
Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that the system will be Out of
Service (OOS) for a period of time.
Table A-1. URH System Configuration
EMS VIEW PARAMETER SETTING
IP ADDRESSES
Host Network port IP address
Host Craft port IP address
Remote 1 IP address
Remote 2 IP address
Remote 3 IP address
Remote 4 IP address
Remote 5 IP address
Remote 6 IP address
Remote 7 IP address
Remote 8 IP address
HOST CONFIGURATION
Host Summary Host Name
10 MHz Reference Clock
Optical Ports view for the Host Optical Port 1 name
Optical Port 2 name
Optical Port 3 name
Optical Port 4 name

Optical Port 5 name
Optical Port 6 name
Optical Port 7 name
Optical Port 8 name
Configuration and Alarm Details
of DART 1
DART Name
DART Pass Band
DART Operating Mode
DART Diversity Status list
DART Forward Gain
DART Reverse Gain
of DART 2
DART Name
DART Pass Band
DART Operating Mode
DART Forward Gain
DART Reverse Gain
of DART 3
DART Name
DART Pass Band
DART Operating Mode
DART Forward Gain
DART Reverse Gain
of DART 4
DART Name
DART Pass Band
DART Operating Mode
DART Forward Gain
DART Reverse Gain
of DART 5
DART Name
DART Pass Band
DART Operating Mode
DART Forward Gain
DART Reverse Gain
of DART 6
DART Name
Table A-1. URH System Configuration (Cont.)
DART Pass Band
DART Operating Mode
DART Forward Gain
DART Reverse Gain
of DART 7
DART Name
DART Pass Band
DART Operating Mode
DART Forward Gain
DART Reverse Gain
of DART 8
DART Name
DART Pass Band
DART Operating Mode
DART Forward Gain
DART Reverse Gain
REMOTE CONFIGURATION
Remote Unit view Remote Name
Optical Ports view for Remote n Optics Port Name
Configuration Details window DART name
Remote Dart Id
Remote Dart SFP Id
DART Forward Gain
DART Forward Delay
DART Reverse Delay
LPA Operating Mode
Table A-1. URH System Configuration (Cont.)

A.4.2 Remove the SeRF Card
2 Remove Network and Craft RJ-45 plugs from the front of the SeRF Card.
3 Remove fiber patch cord from the SFPs. Note the location of the fiber patch cords.
4 Loosen the two thumb screws that secure the System Card to the front of the Host
enclosure.
5 Use the two handles to carefully withdraw the SeRF Card from the enclosure.
procedure.
not look directly into the optical transmitter of any unit or exposure to laser radiation
may result. An optical power meter should be used to verify active fibers. A protective
cap or hood MUST be immediately placed over any radiating transmitter or optical fiber
connector to avoid the potential of dangerous amounts of radiation exposure. This
practice also prevents dirt particles from entering the connector.
Improper handling can damage fiber optic cables. Do not bend fiber optic cable more
sharply than the minimum recommended bend radius specified by the cable
manufacturer. Do not apply more pulling force to the cable than specified.
22397-A HANDLES
If you plan to reconfigure the system once the new SeRF is installed, skip to
Section A.5.2, Installing a New DART Card in the Host Chassis, on page 309.
If you will be removing the Compact Flash card from the old SeRF and
installing it into the new SeRF before installing the SeRF card in the Host, go
to Section A.4.3, Swap Compact Flash From Old SeRF Card to New SeRF Card,
on page 307.
A.4.3 Swap Compact Flash From Old SeRF Card to New
SeRF Card
7 Remove the Compact Flash card from the new SeRF card by gently lifting the
Compact Flash card out of its holder.
8 Slide the Compact Flash removed from the old SeRF card into the new SeRF card.
Install the Compact Flash card label side up, and with the connectors pointing
toward the middle of the SeRF card. Gently push the Compact Flash card in until
it is firmly seated.
Do not complete this procedure if you are going to reconfigure the URH system after you
install the new SeRF cardskip to Install New SeRF Card on page 308.
75348p2-0001
Compact Flash card
SeRF card

A.4.4 Install New SeRF Card
9 Slide replacement SeRF Card into the Host chassis until it is firmly seated.
10 Secure the SeRF Card to the front of the enclosure using the two thumb screws
loosened in Step 4.
11 If necessary, install new SFPs or remove them from the SeRF card removed in
Step 5 and install them in the new SeRF Card.
12 Plug fiber patch cords back into the SFPs, making sure that you return the fiber
patch cords to the position they were in prior to this procedure.
13 Plug Network and Craft RJ-45 plugs into the connector on the SeRF Card. Make
certain the fiber patch cords are inserted in the correct SFP.
operation.
If you are going to swap the Compact Flash card from the old SeRF card to the new,
before starting this procedure, complete the steps in Swap Compact Flash From Old SeRF
Card to New SeRF Card on page 307.
DART Card Replacement/Installation Procedure
A.5 DART CARD REPLACEMENT/INSTALLATION
PROCEDURE
Each DART card is spectrum specific and provides an interface between the SeRF and
the Power Amplifier. When additional service is needed another DART card can be
added to the Host. Individual DART cards may be replaced without disrupting service
to the entire remote system. Only the RF spectrum of the DART card being removed
is affected.
A.5.1 Replacing a DART Card in the Host Chassis
1 Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that the DART card is being
replaced.
2 Disconnect REF IN and OUT cables from the front of the DART card.
3 Loosen the two thumb screws that secure the DART card to the front of the Host
enclosure.
4 Carefully withdraw the DART card from the enclosure.
5 Slide replacement DART card into the Host chassis until it is firmly seated.
6 Secure the DART card to the front of the enclosure using the two thumb screws
loosened in Step 3.
7 Connect REF IN and OUT cables to the front of the DART card.
operation.
A.5.2 Installing a New DART Card in the Host Chassis
1 Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that another DART card is
being added the Host.
2 Determine slot location of the new DART card. See Figure 1-6 on Page 14 for DART
card slot assignments.
If you replace or install a DART card in the Host to change the RF, its equivalent must
be replaced or added to the Remote by adding or replacing the corresponding Remote
RF Module.
procedure.
procedure.

3 Remove from the front of the Host the blank panel that corresponds to the
selected slot location.
If you are installing a Dual SuperDART card:
a Loosen the two retaining screws on the front of the blank panel and then
then remove the blank panel.
b Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the divider bar,
and then remove the divider bar, storing the bar and screws for potential
future use.
If a Dual SuperDART card had previously been installed and you are now
installing a Single SuperDART or Classic DART, use two Phillips-head screws
to reinstall a divider bar.
Blank Panel with
2 Retaining Screws
Divider Bar with
2 Philips-Head Screws
77073-079
DART Card Replacement/Installation Procedure
5 Slide the DART card into the Host chassis until it is firmly seated.
6 Secure the DART card to the front of the enclosure using the two thumb screws.
7 Obtain the required lengths of high performance, flexible, low loss 50-ohm coaxial
communications cable (RG-400 or equivalent) for all coaxial connections.
8 Route the forward and reverse path coaxial cables between the Host and the BTS
interface (per system design plan) and cut to the required length. Allow sufficient
slack for dressing and organizing cables at the Host and for installing an external
attenuator in the forward path link.
9 Terminate each cable with an QMA-type male connector following the connector
suppliers recommendations.
10 If required, install an external attenuator in the forward path.
11 Connect the forward and reverse path cables as shown as shown in Step 21 in
Section 3.3.5, Coaxial Cable Connections, on page 68:
a Connect the forward path cable to the FWD RF IN connector on the Host DART
front panel.
b Connect the reverse path cable to the REV RF OUT connector on the Host DART
front panel.
12 Dress and secure cables at the right side of the Host.
13 Complete all remaining coaxial connections as specified in the system design
plan.
14 Notify the NOC or alarm monitoring system operator that the DART card is ready
for operation.
The composite forward path RF signal level at the Host must be between 25 and +5
dBm. Do not connect the forward path cable until the composite forward path RF signal
level is measured and the amount of external attenuation required is determined.
22401-A

B
GENERAL INFORMATION
B.1 Warranty/Software...........................................................................................313
B.2 Software Service Agreement..............................................................................313
B.3 Repair/Exchange Policy.....................................................................................313
B.4 Repair Charges ................................................................................................314
B.5 Replacement/Spare Products .............................................................................314
B.6 Returned Material.............................................................................................314
B.1 WARRANTY/SOFTWARE
The Product and Software warranty policy and warranty period for all ADC Products
is published in ADCs Warranty/Software Handbook. Contact the Technical
Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891, extension 73476 (in U.S.A. or Canada) or
952-917-3476 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) for warranty or software information or
for a copy of the Warranty/Software Handbook.
B.2 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
ADC software service agreements for some ADC Products are available at a nominal
fee. Contact the Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891, extension 73476 (in
U.S.A. or Canada) or 952-917-3476 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) for software service
agreement information.
B.3 REPAIR/EXCHANGE POLICY
All repairs of ADC Products must be done by ADC or an authorized representative.
Any attempt to repair or modify ADC Products without written authorization from
ADC voids the warranty.
If a malfunction cannot be resolved by the normal troubleshooting procedures, call
the Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891, extension 73476 (in U.S.A. or
Canada) or 952-917-3476 (outside U.S.A. and Canada). A telephone consultation can
sometimes resolve a problem without the need to repair or replace the ADC Product.
Content Page

If, during a telephone consultation, ADC determines the ADC Product needs repair,
ADC will authorize the return of the affected Product for repair and provide a Return
Material Authorization number and complete return shipping instructions. If time is
critical, ADC can arrange to ship the replacement Product immediately. In all cases,
the defective Product must be carefully packaged and returned to ADC.
B.4 REPAIR CHARGES
If the defect and the necessary repairs are covered by the warranty, and the applicable
warranty period has not expired, the Buyers only payment obligation is to pay the
shipping cost to return the defective Product. ADC will repair or replace the Product
at no charge and pay the return shipping charges.
Otherwise, ADC will charge a percentage of the current Customer Product price for
the repair or NTF (No Trouble Found). If an advance replacement is requested, the full
price of a new unit will be charged initially. Upon receipt of the defective Product,
ADC will credit Buyer with 20 percent of full price charged for any Product to be
Out-of-Warranty. Products must be returned within thirty (30) days to be eligible for
any advance replacement credit. If repairs necessitate a visit by an ADC
representative, ADC will charge the current price of a field visit plus round trip
transportation charges from Minneapolis to the Buyers site.
B.5 REPLACEMENT/SPARE PRODUCTS
Replacement parts, including, but not limited to, button caps and lenses, lamps,
fuses, and patch cords, are available from ADC on a special order basis. Contact the
Technical Assistance Center at 1-800-366-3891, extension 73476 (in U.S.A. or Canada)
or 952-917-3476 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) for additional information.
Spare Products and accessories can be purchased from ADC. Contact Sales
Administration at 1-800-366-3891, extension 73000 (in U.S.A. or Canada) or
1-952-938-8080 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) for a price quote and to place your order.
B.6 RETURNED MATERIAL
Contact the ADC Product Return Department at 1-800-366-3891, extension 73748 (in
U.S.A. or Canada) or 952-917-3748 (outside U.S.A. and Canada) to obtain a Return
Material Authorization number prior to returning an ADC Product.
All returned Products must have a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number
clearly marked on the outside of the package. The Return Material Authorization
number is valid for 90 days from authorization.
C
GLOSSARY
Alarm
A physical or functional state affecting the ability of a Host/Remote pair to function normally.
Reported by the Host/Remote pair to the EMS to notify the user that such a state exists.
Attenuation
Function applied to an RF signal to lower the signal level. Can be set for a Host/Remote pair
using an EMS window or command.
Band
RF spectrum defined as an entity for communication purposes and assignable to a service
provider for cell phones and similar devices. Examples are Cellular and PCS.
Base Transceiver Station
Signal processing station at the base of a tower or at some other location with access to the
main antenna. Its primary function is to transport RF signals between the main antenna and
cell phone users.
BTS
See Base Transceiver Station.
DART
Digital to Analog Receiver Transmitter. Interface card used in both Host and Remotes. Its
primary function is data conversion of RF to optical and vice versa. Each DART provides one
RF band.
Delay
RF propagation delay, which can be set for a linked Host DART and Remote DART using an
EMS window or command.
EMS
FlexWave Prism Element Management System, the software application documented in this
document.
ENET Port
Ethernet port capable of CAT5 transmission.

Forward Path
Signal path in the direction from the BTS to the cell phone.
Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
HTTP is a is a request/response standard used by the World Wide Web in which the WWW is
a web site is the server and the end user is the client. The EMS uses HTTP to allow access to a
Host or Remote through its IP address.
Host Unit
FlexWave Prism network element that receives an RF signal from the BTS and converts it to
an optical signal to its paired Remotes.
Linear Power Amplifier(LPA)
An electronic module in the Remote. Its job is to provide a large power gain to forward path
signals.
LNA
Low Noise Amplifier. An electronic module in the Remote. The LNA amplifies the reverse path
RF signal.
Log File
EMS history file into which alarms are written as they occur. It can be used to review recent
alarms.
Mask
A software setting placed on an alarm type that causes all alarms of this type to not be reported
in the EMS. The LEDs for a masked alarm display in gray instead of the standard red, yellow,
and green.
Normal Mode
One of the operating modes of the DART and LPA. In this mode the equipment is transporting
RF signals normally.
Radio Frequency
(RF) Radio-type frequency modulation signal received at the BTS and transmitted from the
Remote to the cell phone.
Reverse Path
Signal path in the direction from the cell phone to the BTS.
Remote Unit
FlexWave Prism network element that receives an optical signal from its paired Host, converts
the optical signal to RF, and transmits the RF signal to cell phones in a local coverage area.
RF Signal Level
Measured power of the forward path and reverse path RF signals as measured in the
Host/Remote pair and reported in the EMS.
Standby Mode
One of the operating modes of the DART and LPA. In this mode, RF transport is disabled and
power consumption is minimized.
Threshold
Value that defines when a reported state in the Host/Remote pair is considered to be in alarm.
URH
Universal Radio Head. This name derives from the ability of a FlexWave URH Remote to
support multiple bands of different types.

D
CONTACTING ADC
13944-Q
Contents herein are current as of the date of publication. ADC reserves the right to change the contents
without prior notice. In no event shall ADC be liable for any damages resulting from loss of data,
loss of use, or loss of profits and ADC further disclaims any and all liability for indirect, incidental,
special, consequential or other similar damages. This disclaimer of liability applies to all products,
publications and services during and after the warranty period.
REPRINTS:
www.adc.com/manuals
PDF copies of manuals are available
for downloading at the following link:
PRODUCT INFORMATION AND TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE:
connectivity.tac@adc.com
wireless.tac@adc.com
euro.tac@adc.com
asiapacifc.tac@adc.com
ADCP Number:
WRITE:
ADC Telecommunications (SPORE) PTE, LTD;
100 Beach Road, #18-01, Shaw Towers.
Singapore 189702.
ADC Telecommunications, INC
PO Box 1101,
Minneapolis, MN 55440-1101, USA
ADC European Customer Service, INC
Belgicastraat 2,
1930 Zaventem, Belgium
77-073
PHONE :
U.S.A. or CANADA
Sales: 1-800-366-3891
Extension 73000
Technical Assistance: 1-800-366-3891
Connectivity Extension: 73475
Wireless Extension: 73476
EUROPE
Sales Administration: +32-2-712-65 00
Technical Assistance: +32-2-712-65 42
EUROPEAN TOLL FREE NUMBERS
Germany: 0180 2232923
UK: 0800 960236
Spain: 900 983291
France: 0800 914032
Italy: 0800 782374
ASIA/PACIFIC
Sales Administration: +65-6294-9948
Technical Assistance: +65-6393-0739
ELSEWHERE
Sales Administration: +1-952-917-3000
Technical Assistance: +1-952-917-3475

INDEX
Numerics
10 MHz Reference Clock list ................... 136
4G readiness ..............................................4
A
AC power junction box ........................... 112
AC power port ........................................ 115
AC Power Supply Fault LED .................... 228
AC power wiring, Remote ................112115
Access
Network Manager ............................. 188
Network User ................................... 188
Access Level list ..................................... 188
Accessing
EMS ................................................. 176
FlexWave-URH Agent MIB ................ 266
AccessLevel column ............................... 185
ADC-FLEXWAVE-URH.mib ...................... 264
Add New User link .......................... 185, 187
add user ................................................ 188
admin user access ................................. 184
Agent SwVer column,
System Inventory table ....................... 169
Alarm
Major, DARTs ...................................239
Alarm Details of DART-n of Group n on
Remote-n window ........ 222224, 239240
Alarm Indications ...................................129
Alarm Management Table window .. 246, 248
Alarm Summary indicator ....................... 166
Alarm Summary of RF Groups of Remote-n
view ............................................ 236237
Alarm Type column ................................ 244
Alarms
Minor, DARTs ...................................240
Antenna cable, Remote .................. 110112
Applications, FlexWave Prism .................... 5
Apply button .............................................xi
APPMon SwVER column, System Inventory
table ...................................................169
Auto Refresh list .....................................167
Auto Refresh Time box ........................... 167
AWS bandwidths ................................ 2425

B
Band-Config link ............................ 140, 156
Bandwidths
AWS ............................................ 2425
DART cards .................................. 2023
options ........................................ 2023
PCS .............................................. 2425
versus timeslots ................................. 19
Boot Loader Ver column, System Inventory
table ................................................... 169
C
Canceling a procedure ............................... xi
Caution icon ...............................................x
Change Access Level button ........... 185, 191
Change Access Level window ................. 191
Change password
another user .............................194195
your own ......................................... 196
Change Password button . 185, 194, 195, 196
Change Password Settings view
changing anothers password ........... 194
changing your password .................. 196
Chassis ground
Host ................................................... 67
Remote ............................................ 105
Class column, SNMP interface ................ 275
Clock source, setting .......................135137
Close button ............................................. xi
Coaxial cable
install, Host ................................. 6869
Compact Flash SwVer column, System
Inventory table ................................... 169
Components
Prism system .......................................6
Remote Unit ....................................... 36
of Dart n on Host-n window ................ 214
Configuration and Alarm Details window 141,
............................................................158
Configuration Details table ..................... 151
Configuration link ...................................167
Configuring Host DARTs ................. 140143
Confirmation dialog
decommissioning a Host DART ......... 209
decommissioning a Remote DART .... 222
decommissioning a Remote Unit ...... 231
delete user .......................................198
reset Host Unit ................................. 204
reset unit .........................................233
Connect to dialog
local login
Host ...........................................181
Remote ......................................179
remote log in ...................................176
Connectors
Remote ........................................ 4647
Course Wavelength Division Multiplexer
System ............................................ 5053
Craft port
Host ...................................................78
Craft Port status, Host ............................ 206
D
DART alarm ............................................236
DART cards
alarms
Major .........................................239
Minor .........................................240
bandwidths .................................. 2023
configuring ............................... 140143
decommissioning
Host ................................... 208209
Remote ............... 220222, 230231
install, Host .............................. 309311
linking ...................................... 150154
overview ...................................... 1215
unlink ...............................................161
DART DC Supply Fault ............................ 239
..............................141, 142, 159, 161, 162
DART Fault
Host ................................................. 215
Remote ............................................ 239
DART Forward Delay box ....................... 154
DART Forward Gain list .......................... 153
DART Hardware Mismatch Fault
Host ................................................. 215
Remote ............................................ 239
DART Indicator ....................................... 202
DART Low Temperature Fault ................. 240
DART Name box ......................141, 158, 161
DART Operating Mode list .......141, 159, 161
DART Over Drive Fault ........................... 215
DART Over Temperature Fault ............... 239
DART Pass Band (Timeslots) list .... 141, 158,
161
DART Remote Ranging Fault .................. 239
DART Reverse Delay box ........................ 154
DART Reverse Gain list .......................... 142
DART UnderDrive Fault .......................... 215
Date Code column
Host Inventory table ........................ 170
Remote Inventory table ................... 171
Date column, SNMP interface ................. 275
Decommission button ............................ 151
Decommission Unit button ..................... 229
Decommissioning
Host DART ................................208209
Remote DART ............220222, 230231
Delete Entry button ................................ 275
Delete the Selected Rows ....................... 275
Delete User button ......................... 185, 198
Determine power, Remote .............. 116118
Diversity reverse path ..............................17
Divider bar, Host Unit ............................. 310
Duplexer, remote .....................................40
E
E911 Support ...........................................16
E911 support ............................................16
EMS Menu bar ................................ 126, 128
EMS View Frame ....................................126
Enable Logging check box ...................... 275
ENET Configurations view
Host ......................................... 205207
Remote .................................... 218219
ENETMon SwVer column, System Inventory
table ...................................................169
Ethernet CAT 5 cable .............................. 130
EXT REF connections, Host ................. 7677
F
Fan Over Speed Fault ............................. 228
Fan Under Speed Fault ........................... 228
Fan, Host ...............................................298
Fiber Optic Transport .......................... 1718
Finishing a procedure ................................xi
FlexWave URH EMS ................................... 4
accessing .........................................266
GET/SET Objects ...................... 276291
Traps ....................................... 292294

Fonts ........................................................ xi
Forward path optical signal ...................... 17
FPGA Ver column, System Inventory table ..
169
FPGAMon SWVer column, System Inventory
table ................................................... 170
Function Explorer Tree ........................... 126
Fwd Launch column
Host ................................................. 213
Remote ............................................ 235
G
General Configuration window ................ 167
Graphical User Interface, overview ........ 126
Green LED .............................................. 129
Grey LED ............................................... 129
H
Handset interface, remote ........................ 36
Host ....................................................... 156
Host Dart Band column .......................... 151
Host Dart Id column ............................... 151
Host Dart Pass Band column .................. 151
Host Dart SFP Id column ........................ 151
Host DART Status column ...................... 151
Host DARTs Alarm Summary view ..............
..............................140, 156, 208, 214215
Host DARTs, configuring .................140143
Host ENET Configurations view .......205207
Host IP Address field .............................. 166
Host Lost Fault LED ................................ 228
Host Major Contact Alarm
Output Indicator ..................................202
Host Minor Contact Alarm
Output Indicator ..................................202
Host mounting brackets ..................... 6465
Host Name box .......................................135
Host Name column ................................. 244
Remote ............................................235
Host Name, creating ....................... 135137
Host Name, Function Explorer Tree ........ 136
Host No column ......................................244
Host SERF optical ports, labeling ............ 139
Host Summary view ................135137, 202
Host Temperature Measurement ............ 211
Host Unit
DARTs
decommissioning ............... 208209
linking to Remote ............... 150154
front panel ................................... 3033
network connection ............................33
overview ............................................30
resetting .................................. 203204
RF signal connections .........................33
specifications .....................................55
system card .......................................34
Host Unit Name field .............................. 166
Hw Ver column
HWMon SwVer column, System Inventory
table ...................................................169
I
Icons ..........................................................x
Illustrations ............................................... xi
Indoor coverage .........................................4
Information column ........................ 140, 156
Installation
Host
chassis ground ............................. 67
Coaxial cable ......................... 6869
Craft port ..................................... 78
EXT REF connections ............. 7677
Optical connections ................ 7075
Optical connections, no WDM . 7273
Optical connections, with WDM ..74
75
OSP Fiber cable ........................... 66
Power connections ................. 8184
System Alarm connections ..... 7981
WDM components .................. 8889
Host DART card ........................309311
Host fan ........................................... 298
Host into equipment rack ............. 6465
Host power supply ........................... 299
Host SeRF card .........................303308
Host system card ......................301302
Remote
AC power wiring .................112115
Antenna cable .....................110112
determine power ................116118
ground wire ............................... 105
mounting plans ............................ 94
Network cable .....................106107
Quad Fiber cable .................108110
RF Module .................................. 96104
Installation prerequisites
Host ................................................... 62
Internet Explorer ................................... 130
IP Address field ...................................... 166
Ip Enable ....................................... 139, 235
setting, Remotes .............................. 146
IpEnable Fault ........................................ 213
L
Labeling
Host SERF optical ports .................... 139
Host Unit .................................. 135136
Remote .................................... 144145
Laser Fault column
Host .................................................213
Remote ............................................235
LC Attenuator ...........................................71
LEDs, alarms ..........................................129
Lightning Surge Suppressor .....................49
Linear Power Amplifier, Remote ................41
Linking ...................................................147
Remote DART to Host DART ..... 150154
remote DART to Host DART ...... 150154
Linux Kernel Ver column, System Inventory
table ...................................................169
LNA alarm ..............................................237
LNA Major Alarms ...................................240
LNA Power Fault .....................................240
LongRange
Host .................................................213
Remote ............................................235
Low Noise Amplifier, remote .....................40
LPA
restarting ................................. 222225
LPA alarm ...............................................236
LPA DC Fault ..........................................240
LPA Resets .......................................223
LPA Disable Fault ....................................240
LPA Resets .......................................223
LPA High Temperature Fault ................... 240

LPA Loop Fault ....................................... 240
LPA Resets ....................................... 223
LPA Low Power Fault .............................. 240
LPA Resets ....................................... 224
LPA Major Alarms ................................... 240
LPA Minor Alarms ................................... 240
LPA Missing Fault ........................... 224, 240
LPA Over Power Fault ............................. 240
LPA Resets ....................................... 223
LPA Reset button ........................... 151, 222
LPA VSWR Fault ..................................... 240
LPA Resets ....................................... 223
M
Major alarms .......................................... 129
Major Alarms table ................................. 228
Management Port status ........................ 206
Masking alarm types .............................. 246
MATEMon SwVER column,
Materials
Host installation ................................. 63
Remote installation ............................ 93
Menu bar ............................................... 128
Message, SNMP interface ....................... 275
MIB ........................................................ 262
MIB browser ........................................... 265
Millimeter wave backhaul ...........................4
Millimeter Wave System ........................... 54
Minor alarms .......................................... 129
Minor Alarms table ................................. 228
Module Number column ......................... 244
Module Type column .............................. 244
Module Type column,
Mounting brackets, remote .......................45
Mounting plans, Remote ...........................94
Multi Fibers ............................................147
Multi-Host system
overview ...................................... 1011
Multi-Host Systems ..................................10
N
Network cable, Remote .................. 106107
Network Interface Card .......................... 130
Network Interface list .............................137
Network Manager access level ................ 184
Network Manager role ............................ 188
Network Manager, assign role of ............ 188
Network Port status
Host .................................................206
Network User
assign role of ...................................188
change user role .............................. 191
Network User access level ...................... 184
Network User role ..................................188
networkManager
add user ...........................................188
change user account ........................ 191
networkUser ...........................................188
change user account ........................ 191
New Link list
Host DARTs ......................................161
New Password box ..................188, 195, 196
Normal mode .......................... 141, 159, 161
Note icon ...................................................x
O
OK button ................................................. xi
Old Password box ................................... 196
Open Door Fault ..................................... 228
Operator access level ............................. 184
OptEnetPort status, Host ........................ 206
Optical connections, Host ................... 7075
Optical Ports alarm
Host ................................................. 210
Remote ............................................ 234
Optical Ports On Remote-n view ......234235
Optical Ports view
Host .................................. 139, 212213
Remote ............................................ 146
Optics Name column
Host ................................................. 213
Remote ............................................ 235
Optics Number column
Host ................................................. 213
Remote ............................................ 235
Optics Port Name box
Host ................................................. 139
Remote ............................................ 146
Optics Type column
Host ................................................. 213
Remote ............................................ 235
OSP Fiber cable ........................................ 66
Outdoor coverage ......................................4
Over Temperature Fault
Host ................................................. 211
Remote LED ..................................... 228
OverDrive Fault column
Host ................................................. 213
Remote ............................................ 235
Overview
DART cards .................................. 1215
E911 support .....................................16
Graphical User Interface .................. 126
Host Unit ............................................30
Multi-Host systems ....................... 1011
Prism system ...................................... 4
SNMP interface ..................260, 261263
URH Element Management Software .....
124...............................................125
Wavelength Division Multiplexer System
85 ..................................................88
P
ParserEditor ...........................................275
Part Number column
Passwords, changing
another user ............................ 194195
your own ..........................................196
PCS bandwidths ................................. 2425
Power connections
Host ............................................. 8184
Power Det alarm ....................................237
Power Detector Major Alarms ................. 239
Power supply
remote ...............................................43
Power supply, Host ................................. 299
Primary Clock Priority Fault .................... 211
Prism system
components ........................................ 6
Host Unit overview .............................30
overview ............................................. 4
product family .............................. 2829
ProAx connector dust cover .................... 108
Procedures ................................................xi

Q
Quad Fiber cable, Remote ...............108110
R
Receive broadcast packet counter
Host ................................................. 207
Remote ............................................ 219
Receive byte counter
Host ................................................. 206
Remote ............................................ 218
Receive FCS error counter
Host ................................................. 206
Remote ............................................ 218
Receive fragments counter
Host ................................................. 207
Remote ............................................ 219
Receive jabber counter
Host ................................................. 207
Remote ............................................ 219
Receive multicast packet counter
Host ................................................. 207
Remote ............................................ 219
Receive packet counter
Host ................................................. 206
Remote ............................................ 218
Red LED ................................................. 129
Re-enter Password box ...........188, 195, 196
Refresh button .......................................... xi
Remote Alarm Summary view ................ 226
Remote Antenna Cable Connections ......... 48
Remote Capacity field ............................ 228
Remote Cooling ........................................ 48
Remote Dart Id column .......................... 151
Remote Dart SFP Id column ................... 151
Remote Dart Status column ................... 151
Remote Fiber Connector Cable Assembly . 48
Remote Grounding ...................................48
Remote IP Address field ......................... 166
Remote Lost Fault LED ........................... 228
Remote Major Contact Alarm Output
Indicator .............................................202
Remote Minor Contact Alarm Output
Indicator .............................................202
Remote Name box ..................................145
Remote Name column ............................ 244
Remote name, entering .................. 144145
Remote No column ................................. 244
Remote Optical Port Name Configuration
window ...............................................146
Remote RF Module Shelf ..........................96
Remote SERF ENET ................................ 218
Remote Temperature field ...................... 228
Remote Unit
connectors ................................... 4647
DARTs
decommissioning ............... 220222
linking to Host .................... 150154
mounting brackets .............................45
power supply .....................................43
resetting .................................. 232233
RF modules .................................. 3839
SeRF modules ....................................42
Solar Shield ........................................44
remote Unit
components .......................................36
handset interface ...............................36
Linear power Amplifier .......................41
Low Noise Amplifier ............................40
specifications .....................................56
remote unit
Duplexer ............................................40
Remote Unit Name field ......................... 166
Remote Unit view ...................................144
Replacement
Host DART card ........................309311
Host SeRF card .........................303308
Host system card ......................301302
replacement
Host fan ........................................... 298
Host power supply ........................... 299
Reset Unit button ........................... 203, 229
Resetting
Host unit ...................................203204
Remote unit ..............................232233
Restarting LPA ................................222225
Rev Receive column
Host ................................................. 213
Remote ............................................ 235
Reverse path optical signal ...................... 17
RF Groups Alarm Summary LED ............. 227
RF Module
installation ................................. 96104
RF Module cables ................................... 102
RF Modules, Remote .......................... 3839
RF Power Fault ....................................... 239
RF transmission
configuring Host DARTs ................... 140
RF-over-fiber transport ..............................4
Rx BroadCast Pkts counter
Host ................................................. 207
Remote ............................................ 219
Rx Bytes counter
Host ................................................. 206
Remote ............................................ 218
Rx Fragmented Frames counter
Host ................................................. 207
Remote ............................................ 219
Rx FSC Errors counter
Host ................................................. 206
Remote ............................................ 218
Rx Jabber Frames counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Rx MultiCast Pkts counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Rx Pkts counter
Host .................................................206
Remote ............................................218
RxBer Fault column
Host .................................................213
Remote ............................................235
RxNoLight Fault column
Host .................................................213
Remote ............................................235
S
Secondary Clock Priority Fault ................ 211
Select radio button ................................. 185
SeRF (Serialized RF) digital protocol .........17
SERF card, alarms, Host ......................... 210
SeRF card, Host ............................. 303308
SERF Fault alarm
Host .................................................210
Remote ............................................234
SERF Indicator
Host .................................................202
SERF LED
Remote ............................................227
SeRF modules, Remote ............................42
Serial Number column
Severity column .....................................244
Show Details button ............................... 275
Simple Network Management Protocol ... 262

SNMP interface ................................261263
overview .......................................... 260
SNMP Procedures ................................... 265
accessing FlexWave-URH Agent MIB 266
registering manager for traps .. 267, 268
viewing traps ............................271275
snmpTargetAddrDomain ........................ 270
snmpTargetAddrName ........................... 270
snmpTargetAddrParams ......................... 270
snmpTargetAddrRetryCount ................... 270
snmpTargetAddrStorageType ................. 270
snmpTargetAddrTAddress ...................... 270
snmpTargetAddrTagList ......................... 270
snmpTargetAddrTimeout ........................ 270
Solar Shield, Remote ............................... 44
Source column, SNMP interface .............. 275
Specifications
Host ................................................... 55
remote ............................................... 56
System Nominal Optical ..................... 57
Standby mode .........................141, 159, 161
Starting a procedure ................................. xi
Switch Port status, Host ......................... 206
System Alarm connections, Host ........ 7981
System card, Host ..........................301302
System Fan Fault ................................... 210
System Inventory link ............................ 168
System Inventory view .......................... 168
System Nominal Optical specifications ..... 57
System Requirements ............................ 130
System VSWR Fault ............................... 239
T
Time Stamp column ............................... 244
Timeslots
versus bandwidths .............................19
Timeslots list
Host DARTs ......................................161
Title
Tools
Host installation .................................63
Remote installation ............................93
Transmit broadcast packet counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Transmit byte counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Transmit multicast packet counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Transmit packet counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Trap Table, SNMP interface .................... 275
Tx BroadCast Pkts counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Tx Byte Counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Tx MultiCast Pkts counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Tx Pkt Counter
Host .................................................207
Remote ............................................219
Type column, SNMP interface ................. 275
U
Undefined mode ......................141, 159, 161
Under Temperature Fault
Host ................................................. 211
Remote LED ..................................... 228
UnderDrive Fault column
Host ................................................. 213
Remote ............................................ 235
Uninterruptible Power Supply ................... 49
Unit column, System Inventory table ..... 169
Unknown_HostName .............................. 166
Unknown_RmtName .............................. 166
UNKNOWN_SFPNAME ............................. 139
UNKNOWN_SFPName
Host ................................................. 213
Remote ............................................ 235
Unlink
Host DARTs ...................................... 161
Remote DART .................................. 164
Unmasking alarm types ......................... 248
Unpack
Host ................................................... 64
URH on SERF of Host view ..............210211
set Master Clock Priority Level ......... 138
URH on SERF of Remote view ................ 234
URH Remote Unit Remote-n summary . 226
229
decommissioning Remote .........230231
resetting Remote ............................. 232
User access levels .................................. 184
User Account Management node ............ 185
User Account Management view ............. 185
User Authentication ................................ 184
User Authorization ................................. 184
User documentation .................................. x
User icon ................................................... x
User ID box ............................................188
User ID field ...........................................191
User roles ...............................................188
UserID column .......................................185
V
View Trap Details. ..................................275
Viewer access level ................................ 184
Viewing
Host Summary view ......................... 202
W
Wave Length column
Host .................................................213
Remote ............................................235
Wavelength Division Multiplexer System 49
50, .................................................. 8588
WDM components, install ................... 8889
White LED ..............................................129
Windows 2000 ........................................130
Windows XP ...........................................130
Y
Yellow LED .............................................129

Website: www.adc.com

Prism System Manual PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Prism System Manual PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

ADC FlexWave

FlexWave Prism system. The information in this

Prism Remote Unit

URH Remote Unit

Você também pode gostar